JP5090128B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of identification information derived and displayed on a predetermined winning line as a display result of the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the winning of the bonus, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a state advantageous to the player such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination including the bonus combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

Such a slot machine is provided with a simultaneous winning combination (for example, a winning combination based on a display result of a predetermined one reel) that can be won simultaneously with an internal lottery at the same time as the bonus winning combination. There is a thing (see, for example, Patent Document 1) that makes a player have a sense of expectation that a role is also won at the same time.
JP 2006-271563 A

  However, in the slot machine of Patent Document 1, the internal lottery of whether or not the simultaneous winning combination is won at the same time as the bonus winning combination is performed according to a predetermined simultaneous winning probability. For this reason, the expectation that can be given to the player by winning the simultaneous winning combination is proportional to the simultaneous winning probability of the simultaneous winning combination, and does not change according to other game results. For example, if the simultaneous winning combination wins based on the display result of a predetermined one reel, the player can have a sense of expectation according to the simultaneous winning combination when it is determined that the simultaneous winning combination will be won. The expectation could not be changed according to the display results of other reels. As a result, the player could only focus on whether or not to win the simultaneous winning combination.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is that bonuses are simultaneously won according to other game results even when it is determined that a simultaneous winning combination will be won. It is to provide a slot machine that can change a player's expectation.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), a display result is derived to a variable display device, one game is completed, and identification information derived and displayed on a predetermined winning line (winning lines L1 to L5) as a display result of the variable display device A slot machine (slot machine 1) that can generate a prize according to the combination of
A specific winning combination (special role, big bonus (1), () with a transition to a specific gaming state (big bonus, regular bonus, challenge bonus) advantageous to the player before the display result is derived to the variable display device. 2) Predetermining means (S402) for determining whether or not it is allowed to generate a plurality of types of winnings including regular bonuses) and general winnings other than the specific winnings (small role, replaying role);
It is determined that the generation of the specific winning is permitted, and when the specific winning is not generated, the specific carry-over means (S405, special work 41c- 3) and
Derivation control means (S403) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display device in accordance with the determination result of the pre-decision means for setting an allowance flag corresponding to a winning determined to be allowed to occur ,
Winning determination means (S404) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred when the display result of the variable display device is derived;
The pre-determining means includes
Determining the effect of setting the permission flag for a particular regular winning the corresponding allowing the generation of specific regular winning of the general winning without permitting the occurrence of pre-Symbol particular winning (red cherry) to the particular regular winning A single determination means (see FIG. 11, for example, red cherry),
Acceptable before SL for said particular regular winning by allowing the generation of specific regular winning when newly determined the fact that by allowing the occurrence of a specific winning sets the permission flag for a particular winning corresponding to the particular winning by determining the effect of setting the flag at the same time, the same prize as when effect that allows the generation of the particular regular winning is determined by the sole determining means, except that the permission flag for that particular winning is set And simultaneous determination means for determining to set an allowance flag corresponding to (see FIG. 11, for example, big bonus (1) + red cherry),
The derivation control means determines the winning line of the predetermined variable display area in a predetermined one of the plurality of variable display areas according to the fact that the generation of the specific general winning is permitted. Including specific identification information deriving control means for deriving specific identification information on one of the winning lines (reel control when winning red cherry, see FIGS. 13 and 14, etc.)
The winning determination means includes a combination of identification information derived on the one winning line as a combination of identification information including the specific identification information as identification information of the specific variable display area (left reel 2L) (" On the condition that the red cherry-Any-Any "), the specific general prize has occurred regardless of the identification information of the non-specific variable display area other than the specific variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas And
The specific identification information derivation control means is determined when the single determination means determines that the occurrence of the specific general winning is permitted and is a predetermined determination result for setting the specific general winning permission flag, and the simultaneous determination When it is determined that the occurrence of the specific winning is determined by the means, and the specific determination result is to set the allowable flag for the specific winning and set the allowable flag for the specific general winning, the ratio is different at different ratios. The specific identification information is derived on the one pay line in the non-specific variable display area (middle reel 2C, right reel 2R) (see FIG. 16, modified examples (42-1) and (42-2)).

According to such a configuration, the expected value of the number of specific identification information included in the combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means is used to determine whether the occurrence of the specific general prize is a specific prize. Control is performed so that the predetermined determination result that is not allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the event is different from the specific determination result that is allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize. For this reason, the feeling of expectation that the occurrence of a specific winning can be allowed at the same time can be changed according to the number of specific identification information derived on one winning line. As a result, for example, even after the occurrence of a particular regular winning is derived specific identification information to a specific variable display area determined, above by a specific identification information in a non-specific variable display region is derived Can change expectations.
In addition, the expected value of the number of specific identification information is determined based on a specific determination result that is permitted when the occurrence of the specific general prize is a predetermined determination result that is not permitted at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize and when the specific prize is generated. It is possible to easily carry out a design for performing control that differs from a certain time. In addition, for example, even if specific identification information is not derived in the specific variable display area and the specific general payout does not occur, the specific information derived in the non-specific variable display area and on one winning line Depending on the number of pieces of identification information, it is possible to change a sense of expectation that the occurrence of a specific prize is allowed at the same time.

The combination of identification information derived on the one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means is higher in the case of the specific determination result than in the predetermined determination result , By including a large amount of the specific identification information (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the number of specific identification information included in the combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means. The expected value may be different depending on whether the occurrence of the specific general prize is not permitted at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize or the occurrence of the specific prize.

According to such a configuration, the case where the occurrence of the specific general winning is the specific determination result allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the specific winning is more than the predetermined determination result that is not allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the specific winning. The combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means becomes a combination containing a lot of specific identification information. For this reason, the feeling of expectation that the occurrence of a specific winning can be allowed at the same time can be changed according to the number of specific identification information derived on one winning line. As a result, for example, even after it is determined that specific identification information is derived in the specific variable display area and occurs in the specific general winnings, the specific identification information is derived in the non-specific variable display area. Can improve expectations.

In addition, the combination of identification information derived on the one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means is higher when the predetermined determination result than the specific determination result, By including a lot of specific identification information (see the modified examples (42-1), (42-2), (43-1), (43-2)), one winning line is obtained by the specific identification information derivation control means. The expected value of the number of specific identification information included in the combination of identification information derived above is allowed when the occurrence of a specific general prize is not allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize and at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize It may be different from time to time.

According to such a configuration, the case where the occurrence of the specific general prize is a predetermined determination result that is not permitted at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize is more than the case where the specific determination result is permitted at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize. The combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means becomes a combination containing a lot of specific identification information. For this reason, the feeling of expectation that the occurrence of a specific winning can be allowed at the same time can be changed according to the number of specific identification information derived on one winning line. As a result, for example, after it is determined that specific identification information is derived in the specific variable display area and occurs in the specific general prize, the specific identification information is not derived or derived in the non-specific variable display area. However, since the number is as small as possible, the expectation can be improved.

The expected value of the number of specific identification information included in the combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means may be, for example, an average value calculated based on a theoretical value It may be an average value calculated based on actual measurement values. As an example of the expected value, for example, the number (0-3) of red cherries that are stopped and displayed on one winning line is a variable X (X0, X1, X2, X3), and the number of these is the theoretical number. probability (e.g., appearance split JCS irradiation shown in FIG. 15) when it is constant P (P0, P1, P2, P3), obtained by calculating the expectation value = X0 · P0 + X1 · P1 + X2 · P2 + X3 · P3 of X It may be a value.

Incidentally, the specific identification information deriving control means, in a high proportion better when the a pre-Symbol particular decision results than when a predetermined decision result, the non-specific variable display area of the plurality of variable display area The specific identification information may be derived on the one pay line in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R (FIG. 16).

  According to such a configuration, the specific identification information derivation control is performed at a higher rate when the occurrence of the specific general prize is not allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize than when the occurrence of the specific prize is allowed. Since the control for making the combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the means into a combination containing a lot of specific identification information is performed by the derivation control means, it is easy to design for the control. Can do.

Moreover, the specific identification information deriving control means, in a high proportion better when the a pre-Symbol predetermined determination results than when a particular determination result, the non-specific variable display area of the plurality of variable display area The specific identification information may be derived on the one winning line in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R (see FIG. 16, modification (42-1)).

  According to such a configuration, the specific identification information derivation control is performed at a higher rate when the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted at the same time as the occurrence of the specific prize than when the occurrence of the specific prize is not permitted. Since the control for making the combination of identification information derived on one winning line by the means into a combination containing a lot of specific identification information is performed by the derivation control means, it is easy to design for the control. Can do.

(2) The specific identification information derivation control means sets the specific identification information to a predetermined number (three) on the one pay line only when the specific determination result is obtained (a bonus is simultaneously won). ) A combination of identification information is derived (see FIG. 16).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for a combination of identification information including a predetermined number (three) of specific identification information on a single pay line.

(3) The variable display device has a plurality of pay lines (see FIG. 1).
The specific identification information derivation control means sets a combination of identification information including the specific identification information at a higher rate when the specific determination result is higher than when the specific determination result is the predetermined determination result . Of these, a specific winning line (winning lines L1, L3, L5 passing through the upper and middle stages of the left reel 2L) is derived (FIGS. 13 to 15).

  According to such a configuration, when a winning line from which a plurality of specific identification information is derived is a specific winning line rather than a winning line other than the specific winning line, the specific winning is generated simultaneously. Expectation for what is allowed can be improved.

Incidentally, the specific winning the plurality of types of specific winning is provided comprising a first particular winning (e.g. big bonus (2)) and the second specific winning (e.g. big bonus (1)),
When the specific winning is generated, control is made to a specific gaming state according to the type of the specific winning that has occurred among a plurality of types of specific gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player (prescribed number of sheets, presence / absence of RT after completion) Specific game state control means (S907) for
The specific identification information derivation control means is newly determined to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize by the simultaneous determination means to be allowed simultaneously with the occurrence of the first specific prize. The specific identification information is derived on the one winning line in the non-specific variable display area at a different rate when it is newly determined to be allowed simultaneously with the occurrence of the specific winning (see FIG. 16). .

  According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation that the occurrence of a specific prize of a type that is highly advantageous for the player is allowed at the same time according to the number of specific identification information derived on one pay line. Can be changed.

The combination of identification information derived on the one winning line by the specific identification information deriving control means allows the generation of the specific general prize by the determination of the simultaneous determination means. The specific identification information is increased at a higher rate when it is newly determined to be allowed simultaneously with the occurrence of the second specific prize than when it is newly determined to be allowed simultaneously with the occurrence. including it may be configured (FIG. 1 6 see) as.

  According to such a configuration, the greater the number of specific identification information derived on one pay line, the higher the degree of expectation that the occurrence of a specific win with a higher degree of advantage for the player is allowed at the same time. Can be improved.

  In addition, the combination of identification information derived on the one winning line by the specific identification information derivation control means allows the generation of the specific general prize by the determination of the simultaneous determination means. The specific identification information is increased at a higher rate when it is newly determined to be allowed at the same time as the occurrence of the first specific prize than when it is newly determined to be allowed at the time of occurrence. (Modification (43-2)) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the lower the number of specific identification information derived on one winning line, the higher the expectation that the occurrence of a specific winning of a type having a higher degree of advantage for the player is allowed at the same time. Can be improved.

( 4 ) The variable display device has a plurality of pay lines (see FIG. 1),
The specific prize is provided with a plurality of types of specific prizes including a first specific prize (for example, big bonus (2)) and a second specific prize (for example, big bonus (1)),
When the specific winning is generated, control is made to a specific gaming state according to the type of the specific winning that has occurred among a plurality of types of specific gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player (prescribed number of sheets, presence / absence of RT after completion) Specific game state control means (S907) for
The specific identification information derivation control means is configured so that the simultaneous determination means newly determines that the generation of the specific general prize is allowed simultaneously with the generation of the first specific prize. The combination of identification information including the specific identification information is set to a specific winning line (left reel) among the plurality of winning lines at a higher rate when it is newly determined that the specific winning is allowed at the same time. To a winning line L5) passing through the middle stage of 2L (FIGS. 13 to 15).

  According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a specific winning of a type having a high degree of advantage for the player is allowed at the same time according to the winning line from which a plurality of specific identification information is derived on one winning line. The expectation for can be changed.

(8) Game value storage means (RAM 41c, S519) for storing the game value owned by the player;
Return control means (settlement process, S606) for performing return control for returning the game value of the size stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined operation means (checkout switch 10); ,
Sound output control means (Ss306) for performing control to output sound effects, and for performing control to continuously output continuous game sound effects over one game;
Means for controlling to lower the volume of a sound effect being output at a normal volume (volume at a set volume level), wherein the sound output control means outputs the continuous game sound effect at a normal volume When the return control is performed in a state of being performed (in response to the operation of the predetermined operation means or in response to the return control being performed by operating the predetermined operation means) And a return volume reduction control means (Ss601 in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 39) for performing control for lowering the volume of the continuous game effect sound or control for stopping the sound output of the continuous game effect sound.

  According to such a configuration, the volume of the continuous game sound effects is reduced by performing return control according to the operation of the operation means by the player while the continuous game sound effects are being output, or The sound of continuous game sound effects stops. In other words, in the state where a continuous game sound effect is being output, if the game is interrupted by the player's intention, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is reduced or the sound output of the continuous game sound effect is stopped. can do. For this reason, in the case where the game is interrupted by the player's intention, the occurrence of inconveniences such as a continuous continuous sound effect being produced at the same volume as during the game is prevented, and the surrounding players are inconvenienced. There is nothing.

  It should be noted that control for lowering the volume of the continuous game sound effect or sound output of the continuous game sound effect when an operation related to the progress of the game (BET operation, game start operation, stop operation, etc.) has not been performed for a predetermined period of time. There may be provided means for performing control to stop the operation.

(9) Release control means (settlement process, S609) for performing release control for canceling the setting of the bet amount in response to an operation of predetermined operation means (settlement switch 10);
Sound output control means (Ss306) for performing control to output sound effects, and for performing control to continuously output continuous game sound effects over one game;
Means for controlling to lower the volume of a sound effect being output at a normal volume (volume at a set volume level), wherein the sound output control means outputs the continuous game sound effect at a normal volume When the release control is performed in a state (in response to the operation of the predetermined operation means or in response to the return control being performed by operating the predetermined operation means) And a release-time volume reduction control means (Ss601 in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 40) for performing control for lowering the volume of the continuous game effect sound or control for stopping output of the continuous game effect sound.

  According to such a configuration, the release control is performed in accordance with the operation of the operation means by the player while the continuous game sound effect is being output, so that the volume of the continuous game sound effect is reduced, or The sound of continuous game sound effects stops. In other words, in the state where a continuous game sound effect is being output, if the game is interrupted by the player's intention, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is reduced or the sound output of the continuous game sound effect is stopped. can do. For this reason, in the case where the game is interrupted by the player's intention, the occurrence of inconveniences such as a continuous continuous sound effect being produced at the same volume as during the game is prevented, and the surrounding players are inconvenienced. There is nothing.

  The control for lowering the volume of the continuous game effect sound means control for lowering the volume of the continuous game effect sound to a predetermined volume, control for muting the continuous game effect sound, or the like. In addition, the control to stop the sound output of the continuous game sound effect is a control to stop the output of the continuous game sound effect, a control to change to another music (for example, a music with a quiet volume, a slow music, etc.) (Refer to Modification (6)).

  Also, the release control means performs release control according to the operation of the predetermined operation means when the bet number is set, and the game value is stored in the game value storage means when the bet number is not set. Return control may be performed by the return control means in accordance with an operation of a predetermined operation means when is stored.

  Also, the release control means performs release control according to the operation of the predetermined operation means when the bet number is set, and the return control means when the game value is stored in the game value storage means Return control may be performed by (see Modification (5)).

  Further, the release control is to release at least the setting of the bet number and store the game value for the released bet number in the game value storage means for storing the game value owned by the player. (Refer modification (5)).

  In a slot machine that emits a predetermined notification sound when return control or release control is performed (including when control starts, during control, when control ends, etc.), return volume reduction control means or release volume By reducing the volume of the continuous game sound effect or by stopping the sound output of the continuous game sound effect by the reduction control means, the sound volume is lowered compared to before the start of sound output after the notification sound is output. Things that mute the continuous game sound effect, those that stop the output of the continuous game sound effect, and those that change to a song that is different from the song before the sound starts (for example, a song with a quiet volume, a slow song, etc.) There may be.

It should be noted that advantageous state control means (S1013 to S1015) for controlling to an advantageous state (RT) advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the big bonus (1) is completed). Prepared,
The sound output control means may perform control to continuously output a continuous game sound effect over one game on condition that the sound control unit is controlled to the advantageous state. Thus, the interest can be improved by continuously outputting the continuous game sound effect when controlled to the advantageous state.

(10) Game control in which a wiring pattern is formed and has a connector (board-side connector 620a) that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and is equipped with a means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game A board (game control board 40);
The game includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components (introduction medal sensor 31);
A relay board having a first connector (connector 621a) and a second connector (connector 622g) for connecting cables, and relaying signal input / output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board (Operation unit relay board 110);
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable (cable 600a) connected to
A second cable (cable 601g) having a connector connected to the second connector on the relay board side at one end, and the gaming electrical component connected to the other end;
Connector connection part (connector 620a, connector 610a part) between the first cable and the game control board, connector connection part (connector 611a, connector 621a part) between the first cable and the relay board, and the second cable Each of the connector connection portions (connector 622g, connector 612g portion) to the relay board is in a connection release restriction state that cannot be released unless the release restriction portion related to the connector connection is destroyed (connector restriction member 500). 650).

  According to such a configuration, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the game control board, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the relay board, and a connector connection between the second cable and the relay board. Each of the portions is in a connection release restricted state that cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connector connection is destroyed, so in any of the three connector connection parts on the game control board and the relay board, Unauthorized devices such as driving tools cannot be connected without leaving traces. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the driving tool as much as possible. Note that the driving tool is used to operate various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board to input and output a signal that simulates the signals input and output to and from the game control board from various electronic components. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing.

(11) a board case (board case 200) for housing the game control board;
The game control board side connector (board side connector 620a) and the first cable connector (cable side connector 610a) which are provided separately from the board case and are attached to the board case. A restricting member (connector restricting member 500) that cannot be released from
Unless the predetermined removal restricting portion (sealing piece 232) is destroyed, the main body of the slot machine and the board case are connected so that the board case cannot be removed from the main body (mounting base 250) of the slot machine. Connecting means (one-way screw)
By connecting the substrate case and the main body of the slot machine by the connecting means, a restricting member removal restricting means for restricting removal of the restricting member from the substrate case is configured.

  According to such a configuration, the cable-side connector is connected to the board-side connector in a state where the attachment-side member is attached to the board case, and then the special member is attached to the attachment-side member to be integrated, thereby configuring the restriction member By doing so, the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case cannot be released, and in this state, the board case and the main body of the slot machine are coupled by the coupling means. The removal of the restriction member from the board case will be restricted, and the connection from the board side connector to the cable side connector will not be made unless the removal restriction part is destroyed and the connection between the board case and the slot machine body is released. Cannot be released. In other words, the cable-side connector cannot be separated from the board case without leaving a trace of destruction of the removal restricting portion, and an illegal instrument such as a driving instrument cannot be connected without leaving a trace. Also, when replacing the board together with the board case containing the board due to a failure or the like, if the removal restricting part is destroyed and the connection between the board case and the slot machine body is released, the restriction member is removed from the board case. Since the connection between the cable-side connector and the board-side connector can be released, the cable-side connector can be separated from the board-side connector and removed from the body of the slot machine together with the board-side connector without damaging the regulating member. It becomes. On the other hand, when replacing only the cable, it is possible to release the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector by destroying the separation restriction part and removing the special member, so that the board case is not wasted. The cable side connector can be separated from the board side connector, and the cable can be removed from the board case.

(12) A mounting portion (locking hole portion 513) provided at a peripheral position of the connector on the game control board side;
When attached to the attachment portion, a special member (connector cover 520) that cannot be separated from the attachment portion unless the predetermined separation regulating portion (connection piece 522a) is destroyed,
By attaching the special member to the attachment portion (locking hole portion 513) in a state where the connector on the first cable side (cable side connector 610a) is connected to the connector on the game control board side (board side connector 620a). A part (covering portion 521) of the special member (connector cover 520) is arranged at a position overlapping the connector direction (cable side connector 610a) on the first cable side, and the connector (cable on the first cable side) The movement of the side connector 610a) in the pulling direction is restricted.

  According to such a configuration, after the cable-side connector is connected to the board-side connector, only the special member is attached to the mounting portion provided around the board-side connector, and a part of the special member is attached to the cable-side connector. Since it overlaps in the disconnection direction and the movement of the cable-side connector in the disconnection direction is restricted, the assembly work can be reduced when the release of the connection between the cable-side connector and the board-side connector is restricted. Further, for example, even when the game control board is housed in the board case, it is only necessary to connect the cable-side connector to the board-side connector as it is, and then attach a special member to the mounting portion. In such a case, in restricting the release of the connection between the cable side connector and the board side connector, the assembling work can be more effectively reduced. In addition, once the special member is attached to the attachment portion, it cannot be removed unless the separation restricting portion is destroyed, so that it is impossible to connect an illegal instrument such as a driving instrument without leaving a trace.

  Further, the mounting portion may be provided at a peripheral position of the board-side connector, may be provided on the game control board itself, or may be provided on a board case that accommodates the game control board. It may be provided, or may be provided on a member attached to the game control board or the board case.

(13) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(14) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing);
A second frame (front door) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open switch 28),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
An open determination that determines whether or not the second frame (front door) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). Means,
Opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(15) Sound output level setting means (volume switch) for setting the sound output level (volume level, for example, large, medium, small, off, etc.);
Further provided is a notification sound output means (sub-control unit 91) for outputting a predetermined notification sound when the return control or the release control is performed (including when control is started, during control, and when control is ended). ,
The sound output control means performs control to output a sound effect at a sound output level volume set by the sound output level setting means,
The notification sound output means outputs the notification sound at a maximum sound output level regardless of the sound output level set by the sound output level setting means.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound that the return control or the release control has been performed is generated at the maximum sound output level regardless of the sound output level set by the sound output level setting means. To make it easier for the player to hear even if the sound output level is set lower than the sound output level that is set by the sound output level setting means. Can do.

(16) Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means, one of the allowable stages is selected from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining that the advance determination means allows the winning. Allowable stage setting means (S111) for setting,
A notification sound output means (sub control unit 91) for outputting a predetermined notification sound when set by the permissible step setting means;
The sound output control means performs control to output a sound effect at a sound output level volume set by the sound output level setting means,
The notification sound output means outputs the notification sound at a maximum sound output level regardless of the sound output level set by the sound output level setting means (see Modification (15)).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound indicating that the allowable stage is selected by the allowable stage setting means is generated at the maximum sound output level regardless of the sound output level set by the sound output level setting means. , Which is easy for a game attendant to hear even if the sound output level is set low compared to the conventional sound output level volume set by the sound output level setting means Can be.

(17) An abnormality determining means (main control unit 41, sub control unit 91) for determining whether an abnormality (for example, a RAM abnormality error, a door opening error, a disconnection error, etc.) has occurred;
Further comprising notification sound output means (sub-control unit 91) for outputting a predetermined notification sound when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred,
The sound output control means performs control to output a sound effect at a sound output level volume set by the sound output level setting means,
The notification sound output means outputs the notification sound at a maximum sound output level regardless of the sound output level set by the sound output level setting means (see Modification (15)).

  According to such a configuration, in order to generate the notification sound that an abnormality has occurred at the maximum sound output level regardless of the sound output level set by the sound output level setting means, the conventional sound output level setting To make it easier for players and game hall staff to hear even when the sound output level is set lower than when generating a notification sound at the sound output level set by the means it can.

(18) Bet number setting means (RAM 41c, S527) for setting a bet number for starting the game,
Light effect means (reel LEDs 55a to 55i) including a plurality of light emitters that irradiate light to the variable display device, and performing effects by changing light emission modes of the light emitters;
Winning determination means (S404) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred when a display result of the variable display device is derived;
Game transition determining means (sub-control unit 91, FIG. 37, Ss506) for determining a transition to a game preparation state in which the betting number for starting a new game can be set by the betting number setting means;
A light emission mode of the plurality of light emitters included in the light effect unit when the game transition determination unit determines that the game preparation state has been transitioned after the winning determination unit determines that the winning has occurred. Winning notification means (sub-control unit 91, Ss506) for notifying that the winning has occurred by setting a predetermined light emission mode (see FIG. 37),
When the bet number is set by the bet number setting means when the winning notification means is informing that the winning has occurred, the winning notification end means (sub control) terminates the notification by the winning notification means. Part 91, Ss506).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify that a winning has occurred. In addition, since the notification is performed after the transition to the game preparation state is determined, the processing load is concentrated at a predetermined timing by performing a plurality of processes in parallel at the end of the game as in the past. Such inconvenience can be prevented. Furthermore, since the notification is terminated when there is an intention from the player that the number of bets is set and the next game is started, it is possible to prevent continuous notification. it can.

(19) Game value storage means (RAM 41c, S519) for storing the game value owned by the player;
Return control means (settlement process, S606) for performing return control for returning the number of game values stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined operation means (checkout switch 10);
Bet number setting means (RAM 41c, S527) for setting the bet number for starting the game;
A release control means (settlement process, S609) for performing a release control for releasing the setting of the bet amount in response to an operation of a predetermined operation means (settlement switch 10);
Light effect means (reel LEDs 55a to 55i) including a plurality of light emitters that irradiate light to the variable display device, and performing effects by changing light emission modes of the light emitters;
Winning determination means (S404) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred when a display result of the variable display device is derived;
Game transition determining means (sub-control unit 91, FIG. 37, Ss506) for determining a transition to a game preparation state in which the betting number for starting a new game can be set by the betting number setting means;
A light emission mode of the plurality of light emitters included in the light effect unit when the game transition determination unit determines that the game preparation state has been transitioned after the winning determination unit determines that the winning has occurred. Winning notification means (sub-control unit 91, Ss506) for notifying that the winning has occurred by setting a predetermined light emission mode (see FIG. 37),
When the operation means (settlement switch 10) is operated when the winning notification means notifies that the winning has occurred, the winning notification end means (sub control unit) terminates the notification by the winning notification means. 91, Ss506).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify that a winning has occurred. In addition, since the notification is performed after the transition to the game preparation state is determined, the processing load is concentrated at a predetermined timing by performing a plurality of processes in parallel at the end of the game as in the past. Such inconvenience can be prevented. Furthermore, since the notification is terminated when there is an intention display from the player that the operation means is operated to interrupt the game, it is possible to prevent the notification from being continued forever.

  In addition, the predetermined light emission mode in the above (18) and (19) may be a mode capable of notifying that the winning has occurred, for example, winning among a plurality of light emitters included in the light effect means. It may be a mode in which only a light emitter provided corresponding to a symbol (configuration symbol) that establishes the occurrence of light is emitted (see FIG. 37), and a symbol (configuration symbol) that establishes the occurrence of winning is different. When it is configured from symbols (for example, grape is “melon-grape-melon”, etc.), and the winning is derived to the first winning line, the second winning line different from the first is When the same symbol (grape) as one of the symbols that establish the occurrence of the prize (for example, the grape of the middle reel 2C) is derived, the second of the plurality of light emitters included in the light effect means. To the winning line Light emission provided corresponding to one of the symbols (grape on the middle reel 2C) of the symbols that establish the occurrence of the winning prize and the same symbol (vines on the left reel 2L or / and the right reel 2R) as the symbol An embodiment in which only the body emits light may be used. Thereby, the derived winning can be notified in a manner that can be easily recognized by the player.

  When the game transition determination means in the above (18) and (19) determines that the award winning has occurred by the winning determination means, the game value giving means has completed the provision of the game value. (If it is determined YES in S1002 of FIG. 28, on condition that a game state command transmitted after S1003 and S1004 is received is determined), the transition to the game preparation state is determined, and the award is given. If it is determined that no display has occurred, the display result is derived to the variable display device (provided that the gaming state command transmitted after it is determined NO in S1002 of FIG. 28 is received). As) The transition to the game preparation state may be determined. Thereby, the game transition determination unit can easily determine the transition to the game preparation state.

The slot machines in (18) and (19) are provided with delay means (freeze state) for delaying the transition to the game preparation state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game (when controlled to the freeze state). To further control processing)
When the shift to the game preparation state is delayed by the delay means when the winning determination means determines that the winning has occurred by the winning determination means (when a delay command is received), It may be configured to notify that the winning has occurred from the start of the delay. As a result, even when the transition to the game semi-state is delayed, since the notification is started at the same timing as when the game is not delayed, a winning occurs without causing the player to feel distrust. This can be easily recognized.

(20) bet number setting means (RAM 41c, S527) for setting the bet number for starting the game;
Light effect means (reel LEDs 55a to 55i) including a plurality of light emitters that irradiate light to the variable display device, and performing effects by changing light emission modes of the light emitters;
Game transition determining means (sub-control unit 91, FIG. 37, Ss506) for determining a transition to a game preparation state in which a bet number for starting a new game can be set by the bet number setting means;
When the special condition (the event that is established according to the progress of the game, such as winning the special role, controlling the AT, continuing RT, etc.) is established, the light effect means is the game preparation state by the game transition determination means. When the transition to is determined, the predetermined lighting (for example, the winning lines L1 to L5 are emitted in a predetermined order) by setting the light emitting modes of the plurality of light emitters included in the light rendering means to a predetermined light emitting mode. The reel LEDs 55a to 55i are controlled to be turned on (see Modification (16)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify that the special condition is satisfied. Further, since the effect is performed after the transition to the game preparation state is determined, the processing load is concentrated at a predetermined timing by performing a plurality of processes in parallel at the end of the game as in the past. Such inconvenience can be prevented.

  When configured as described above, when the light effect means is set by the betting number setting means according to (18) or when the operation means according to (19) is operated, You may comprise so that the said production | presentation may be complete | finished (refer modification (16)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify that a winning has occurred. Further, since the notification is terminated when there is an intention display from the player that the operation means is operated to interrupt the game, it is possible to prevent the notification from being continued forever.

(21) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

  (22) When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the big bonus (1) is finished), a re-game winning that allows the next game to be played without using the gaming value by the predetermining means In the case of including advantageous state control means (S1013 to S1015) for controlling to an advantageous state (RT) having a higher probability of being allowed to be determined than the normal gaming state, the following configuration is provided. Also good.

  The advantageous state control means may control one of a plurality of states having different probabilities that a decision to allow the occurrence of a re-game winning is made (see Modification (17)). Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of state is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the advantageous state control means further ends the predetermined specific gaming state controlled by the specific gaming state control means in response to the occurrence of the predetermined specific winning (big bonus (1)). On the condition that it is controlled to the first advantageous state,
Further, the pre-determining means determines that the first re-game winning and the second re-game winning are allowed out of at least a plurality of types of re-game winnings when controlled to the first advantageous state. Decide whether or not to allow the winning so that the probability of being made is higher than the normal gaming state,
The advantageous state control means includes:
On the condition that the first regame winning has occurred when in the first advantageous state, there is a probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the regame winning is permitted. Control to a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player higher than the state,
On the condition that the second regame winning has occurred in the first advantageous state, there is a probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the regame winning is permitted. Even if the first re-game winning is generated lower than the state, it may be configured to be controlled in a disadvantageous state for a player who does not control to the second advantageous state (see Modification (17)).

  According to such a configuration, when being controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for being controlled to the second advantageous state and to be anxious about being controlled to be disadvantageous. As compared with a slot machine that is not controlled to the second advantageous state or the disadvantageous state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when configured as described above, the advantageous state control means has a probability that the pre-determining means determines that the first regame winning is permitted and the pre-deciding means determines the first state. (2) It is controllable to a plurality of types of first advantageous states having different probabilities of at least one of the probabilities determined to allow the occurrence of the re-game winning, and the predetermined specific gaming state is completed. As described above, it is configured to control to the first advantageous state (RT1, RT1 ′, RT1 ″) corresponding to the type of the predetermined specific gaming state (Big Bonus (1), (1 ′), (1 ″)) (Refer to Modification (17)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the big bonus is ended and the RT symbol is derived, that is, controlled in an advantageous state according to a certain probability. What kind of predetermined specific gaming state is controlled, that is, the predetermined specific gaming state is controlled to the kind of first advantageous state having a high probability of being determined to allow the occurrence of the first regame winning The player can be focused on whether it is controlled. In addition, it is possible to add a sharpness by changing the player's expectation for being controlled to the second advantageous state which is more advantageous according to the type of the predetermined specific gaming state to be controlled. Can be improved.

(23) Advantageous state control means (S1013 to S1015) for controlling to an advantageous state (RT) advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the big bonus (1) is completed) And
After the advantageous state is started, when the pre-determining means determines that the specific winning is allowed before the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games (100 games) Does not end the advantageous state, and ends the advantageous state when the specific winning occurs, or when the number of games digested without the specific winning reaches the prescribed number of games. May be.

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the generation of the specific winning is permitted before the prescribed number of games is reached after the advantageous state is started, the specific winning permitted by the determination must not occur. For example, the advantageous state does not end with the determination, and the advantageous state can be continuously controlled until the prescribed number of games is reached. For this reason, even if it is determined that the occurrence of a specific winning is permitted in the advantageous state, if the specific winning allowed by the determination does not occur, the advantageous state can be digested until the specified number of games is reached. Compared to a conventional slot machine in which the advantageous state is terminated by allowing the occurrence of a specific winning, the advantageous state may give a player a sense of loss when controlled to the advantageous state. Absent. In addition, since the decision to allow the generation of the specific prize is carried over after the next game by the specific carry-over means, it has been decided to allow the generation of the special prize while being controlled to the advantageous state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

  Further, after the advantageous state is started, the pre-determining means determines that the specific winning is allowed before the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games (100 games). In such a case, the advantageous state is not terminated, and the advantageous state is terminated when the specific prize is generated or when the number of games digested without the specific prize has reached the specified number of games. It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the generation of the specific winning is permitted before the prescribed number of games is reached after the advantageous state is started, the specific winning permitted by the determination must not occur. For example, the advantageous state does not end with the determination, and the advantageous state can be continuously controlled until the prescribed number of games is reached. For this reason, the player is given a sense of loss when controlled to the advantageous state, as compared to the conventional slot machine in which the advantageous state is terminated by allowing the occurrence of the specific winning in the advantageous state. There is nothing. In addition, since the decision to allow the generation of the specific prize is carried over after the next game by the specific carry-over means, it has been decided to allow the generation of the special prize while being controlled to the advantageous state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

(24) Advantageous state control means (S1013 to S1015) for controlling to an advantageous state (RT) advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the big bonus (1) is completed) With
The specific prize is a combination of different types of identification information for each of the plurality of variable display areas (for example, the big bonus (1) is “red 7-grape-melon” and the big bonus (2) is “grape-white”. 7-BAR "etc.)
The production execution means
The type controlled to the specific game state is controlled so that the player cannot be specified between the occurrence of the specific prize and the end of the specific game state (the same regardless of the type of bonus) Will perform during the bonus of the content),
Whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (when the game is consumed a predetermined number of times in the bonus, when a predetermined number of medals are paid out in the bonus, or when the bonus ends) You may comprise so that the advantageous state alerting | reporting effect for alerting | reporting may be performed (refer modification (19)).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify the type of the specific winning from the display result, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice which type of specific gaming state is controlled. For this reason, compared with the conventional slot machine in which the type of the specific gaming state is specified from the display result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the advantageous state notification effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(25) Advantageous state control means (S1013 to S1015) for controlling to an advantageous state (RT) advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the big bonus (1) is completed) When,
Game value giving means (S1002 to S1004) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when a prize for winning (small role) with a game value of the prize is derived.
Procedure for performing procedure notification control (navigation effect) for notifying the player of information that can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be derived by the prior determination means Notification means (Ss505),
The advantageous state control means includes means for controlling the advantageous state until the specific winning is generated after the prior determination means determines that the specific winning is permitted (modified example (20)). -1)),
The procedure notification means performs the procedure notification control until a predetermined notification period (the number of AT continuation games during AT) elapses from a predetermined timing (end of the countdown effect) after being controlled to the advantageous state,
In the advantageous state, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting means per game in the advantageous state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification means when it is within the notification period. The amount of game value used for setting the bet amount is increased by operating the stop operation means, and the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is outside the notification period. (Refer to Modification (20-1)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the notification period ends due to the bonus winning against the player's will. The expected value of the amount of game value that is given when the predetermined means is determined to allow the occurrence of the specific prize and is within the notification period until the specific prize is generated is the notification The amount of game value used for setting the number of bets is increased by operating according to the procedure specified from the determined information. Further, the advantageous state is continued at least as long as no specific winning is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the advantageous state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs the stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the specific winning. As a result, the player does not derive a specific prize and performs a stop operation in accordance with the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the player can receive an amount of the game to be given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period. Value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as deriving a specific winning and controlling the game to a specific gaming state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

(26) The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the specific winning and permits the derivation of any one of predetermined general winnings (replays, bananas) determined among the plural types of winnings. Including simultaneous special determination means (see Modification (20-2)) for simultaneously determining
The procedure notification means includes:
A specific value (navigation related) for specifying the notification period in accordance with a predetermined general winning type (replay or banana) determined to allow derivation at the same time as the specific winning by the special simultaneous determining means Including specific value determining means (Ss503, see FIG. 35, modification (20-2)) for determining information, number of AT continuing games, continuation rate, time, etc.
The procedure notification control is performed until the notification period specified based on the specific value determined by the specific value determination means from the predetermined timing elapses (Ss505).

  According to such a configuration, the specific value for specifying the notification period is determined according to a predetermined general winning type for which derivation is permitted at the same time as the specific winning. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation with respect to the length of the notification period according to the type of a predetermined general prize that is allowed to be derived at the same time as the specific prize, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be made.

  The specific value may be the number of games (the number of AT continuation games), the continuation rate, the time, or the number of notifications (Modification (20-3)). reference). In addition, the notification period may be a period in which the number of games is consumed, and is a period until a lottery is made according to a continuation rate determined for each predetermined number of games (for example, every game, every 20 games, etc.). There may be a period until time elapses. In the case where the specific value is the number of games, since it is a notification period until the determined number of games is consumed, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. When the specific value is a continuation rate, the player can have a sense of expectation to continue for each predetermined number of games. When the specific value is time, the operating rate of the slot machine can be improved. When the specific value is the number of notifications, the number of medals paid out during AT can be made almost uniform.

  In addition, as long as the expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value giving means is smaller than the amount of gaming value used for setting the number of bets, even outside the notification period, for example, When it is determined by the pre-determining means that any kind of award winning will be allowed, the player can obtain information that can specify a derivation operation procedure for deriving that kind of winning award according to a predetermined probability. It may be provided with a means for informing. Even when such means are provided, the above-described effects can be achieved.

  (27) In the slot machine of (26), the procedure notifying unit reports information for not deriving a specific winning that is permitted to be derived by the prior determination unit during the notification period (Modification (20 -4)).

  According to such a configuration, the player can continue the advantageous state by performing a stop operation so that the specific winning is not erroneously derived.

  (28) In the slot machine of (26) or (27), the derivation control means is more preferable than the specific winning when the derivation of the predetermined general winning (replay) and the specific winning is allowed. Predetermined winning preferential derivation control means for deriving a predetermined general winning in preference and deriving the specific winning when the predetermined general winning cannot be derived is included (for example, a bonus winning flag and a replay winning flag are in an ON state) (Refer to Reel Control, Modification (20-2)).

  According to such a configuration, in a game in which the derivation of a predetermined general prize and a specific prize is allowed, it is possible to increase the ratio of occurrence of the predetermined general prize and reduce the ratio of occurrence of the specific prize. For this reason, it is possible to increase the ratio of being controlled to the specific gaming state after the game is controlled over the notification period and controlled to the advantageous state.

(29) In the slot machine of any one of (26) to (28), the predetermined general winning includes a first type winning (replay) and a second type winning (banana),
The specific value determining means is configured to determine that the derivation is allowed at the same time as the second type winning, rather than the deciding that the specific winning is allowed at the same time as the first type winning. On the other hand, a value (a large number of games, a high continuation rate, a long time) that can specify a long period as a notification period at a high rate is determined as a specific value (see Modification (20-2)).

  According to such a configuration, it is expected that a longer notification period is specified when the type of the predetermined general prize that is allowed to be derived at the same time as the specific prize is the second type, rather than when the type is the first type. A feeling can be given to the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

(30) A state related to determination of a specific value for specifying a period for performing the procedure notification control according to the type of establishment condition (mode: low accuracy mode, high accuracy mode, ceiling mode, replay triple mode) Further includes a state transition means (Ss502) for transitioning
The specific value determining means determines the specific value according to the state transferred by the state shifting means, on the condition that the advance determination means has determined that the occurrence of the specific winning is permitted. (Ss503).

  According to such a configuration, the specific value for specifying the period for performing the procedure notification control is determined according to the state shifted by the state shift means. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the length of the period during which the procedure notification control is performed according to the type of the transitioned state, and to improve the interest of the game. .

First Embodiment Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open, and a front door pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, “melon”, “grape”, “banana”, “red cherry (dark cherry in FIG. 2)”, “black cherry ( “Black cherry in FIG. 2”, “Star”, “Red 7 (black 7 in FIG. 2)”, “White 7 (white 7 in FIG. 2)”, “BAR” can be distinguished from each other. A plurality of different types of symbols are drawn and arranged in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a reel sensor 33 that detects a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the upper, middle, and lower positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with white light from the back Reel LEDs 55a to 55i to be irradiated are provided.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 3) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white type liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and includes a transmission region corresponding to the transparent window 3 in the display region 51a, and The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area, and a concealing member (for concealing the inside) is provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  The liquid crystal display 51 is configured by enclosing a liquid crystal element between liquid crystal panels in which a plurality of pixels are formed in a matrix. The voltage of each pixel is determined by a drive signal output from a liquid crystal driver (not shown). The transmittance of light is changed by changing the alignment state of the liquid crystal element by controlling.

  Each pixel of the liquid crystal display 51 includes white light from the backlight on the back side and white light from the reel LEDs 55a to 55i (however, in the design portion, white light may be lost depending on the color of the design). R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light is transmitted according to the alignment state of the liquid crystal element to display a color image.

  Each pixel displays 32 gradations for each of RGB. The RGB value of each pixel is expressed as (R, G, B). If it is (0, 0, 0), the white light of the backlight or the white light of the reel LEDs 55a to 55i is not transmitted, and the display is black. However, in the case of (31, 31, 31), the display is transparent, and the portion of the pattern drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is displayed in the color, and the other portions are displayed in white. For RGB values other than (0, 0, 0) and (31, 31, 31), the red, green, and blue colors become stronger as each value increases.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal gaming state described later in this embodiment) A MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting RT (Replay Time) 3 for improving the replay winning probability than the initial gaming state, which will be described later, and 1) for a regular bonus, which will be described later. , Medals memorized as credits and medals used to set the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet amount is returned) A check switch 10 operated at the time, a start switch 7 operated at the start of the game, and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. A selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57, which are operated when browsing or initializing game history data related to the game, are provided so as to be operable by the player. A winning combination panel 89 on which a combination of symbols constituting a plurality of types of winning combinations is written is attached to the front door.

  In addition, the front door displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, a number of medals acquired in a bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, a setting value described later is being changed. And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or the medal payout exit 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30, a throw-in medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal thrown from the medal throw-in section 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side, a front door A door opening detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the open state of the door is provided.

  Inside the housing, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensor 33, reel unit (not shown) composed of reel LEDs 55a to 55i, external output for outputting an external output signal A substrate 1000 (see FIG. 8), a hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and a hopper motor A payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving 34b and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch 36 for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a bonus, which will be described later. Automatic settlement switch for selecting automatic settlement function to enable / disable automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of player's operation) at the end of bonus, which will be described later 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and functioning as a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (race rate) of the lottery Power switch 39 is operated to ON / OFF the power is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning display result. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, which are set across the right-down symbols. There are five types: a winning line L4 set across the upper row of the reels 2R, that is, a symbol lined up to the right, and a winning line L5 set across the symbols lined up in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. It is established as a winning line. When the specified number of 3 is set as the bet number when the initial game state is controlled to RT, all of the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid. When the regular bonus is controlled and the prescribed number 1 is set as the bet number, only the pay line L5 is valid.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, a combination of symbols) on any activated pay line (hereinafter referred to as an effective line). (Also referred to as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R), a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. . Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of active lines, the number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the effective line is totaled, and the total number of medals is It will be given to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any active line, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. ing.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the symbols of 4 frames at maximum are available in 190 milliseconds. Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  In particular, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, voltages are supplied to at least a sub control unit 91 (CPU 91a) described later and a display control circuit 92 described later, among power supply lines that supply the voltage generated by the power supply substrate 100 to each unit. A power supply line for supplying power, a power supply line for supplying voltage to a liquid crystal drive circuit 215 (described later) mounted on the liquid crystal display 51, a power supply line for supplying voltage to an LED drive circuit 93 (described later), and reel LEDs 55a to 55i (described later). A power supply line for supplying a voltage to each other is electrically wired independently.

  Note that electrically independent wiring means that these wiring lines are provided in an electrically non-contact state even when wired on the same cable or the same substrate.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 100.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensor 33 is connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 100. Detection signals from the switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply voltage supplied to slot machine 1 A power interruption detection circuit 48 that monitors and detects a voltage drop when the voltage drop is detected, and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 41a, the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the player, disconnection for monitoring an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A monitoring IC 50 and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, performs processing related to the progress of the game, and game control. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the substrate 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop (for example, whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is a circuit that outputs the signal. Although not shown in particular, the main control unit 41 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt occurs, and the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 The power interruption processing is executed according to the external interrupt.

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all the output ports are initialized, the RAM parity is calculated based on all the data stored in the RAM, set in the parity storage area 41c-7 (see FIG. 9), and the RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area 41c-7, and by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup, It is possible to confirm whether or not the data stored in the RAM is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and these connection states. If one of these is released, a disconnection flag indicating that these connection states have been released is stored in a storage unit such as an EEPROM (not shown) provided in the disconnection monitoring IC 50. . In response to the disconnection flag confirmation request from the CPU 41a, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 returns whether or not the disconnection flag is stored. At this time, the disconnection flag is cleared if it is stored in the storage unit.

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure. For example, unless the power failure state continues for 2 to 3 days, an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is performed. Monitoring of the connection state and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be continued.

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected. The effect relay board 80 is a board provided to ensure one-way information transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90. The effect relay board 80 does not check the game control board 40 or the effect control board 90 by checking this state, and thus an illegal signal (especially an input to the effect control board 90 from the outside) is sent to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40. In other words, it is possible to check whether or not modification has been made so that the signal is input).

  The effect control board 90 is connected with the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 described above, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  The production control board 90 is connected with electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LEDs 55a to 55i arranged on the front door of the slot machine 1, These electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d in the same manner as the main control part 41. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the connected liquid crystal display 51, an LED effect circuit 52 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52, and the reel LEDs 55a to 55i, and an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54. , A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal inputted from switches connected to the effect control board 90 96, output time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, other circuits, and the like are mounted, and the CPU 91a receives various commands for performing effects upon receiving commands transmitted from the game control board 40 and switches connected to the effect control board 90. And controlling each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Unlike the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a executes interrupt processing based on interrupts other than the interruption interrupt processing (sub) when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT). Even if it is in the middle, interrupt the corresponding process and execute the command reception interrupt process, and execute the command reception interrupt process with the highest priority even if other interrupts other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time It is supposed to be.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, details of wiring connection states between the game control board 40 and various game electronic components connected to the game control board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing a wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and the game electronic components connected to the game control board 40.

  FIG. 4 shows a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the number of bets among electronic components such as various switches and sensors connected to the game control board 40, and when starting a game. A start switch 7 that is operated, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set a bet number; Reel motor 32L for rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R, door open detection switches 25, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting the rotation of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stored in a hopper tank The hopper motor 34b for paying out the selected medals from the medal payout exit 9, and the medals to be paid out when a prize is generated are detected. And payout sensor 34c and performance control board 90 is shown to other switches, shown sensors, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, among these, one BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensor 33L, The 33C and 33R, the hopper motor 34b, and the payout sensor 34c are electronic components that input and output signals related to the progress of the game to the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets for making the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic parts 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34b, and 34c output signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. 1 electronic component and a second electronic component to which a signal from the game control board 40 is input as the game progresses.

  Specifically, the single bet switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are operated when setting the bet number and the inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set the bet number are used for the operation or medal of the medal. This is a first electronic component that outputs a BET signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection. Since the main control unit 41 performs the betting number setting process based on the reception of the BET signal, the betting number cannot be set without these electronic components. That is, since the game cannot be started unless the number of bets is set, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are electronic components for games necessary for the progress of the game.

  The start switch 7 that detects an operation for starting a game is a first electronic component that outputs a start signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. Since the main control unit 41 performs a process (reel rotation process or the like) for starting the game based on the reception of the start signal, the game cannot be started without this electronic component. That is, the start switch 7 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that detect an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a stop signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. is there. The main control unit 41 performs the process of deriving the display result by stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the reception of the stop signal. The display result of cannot be derived. That is, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a detection signal for the reference position of the reel to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 does not have this electronic component because it performs processing to stop the rotation by grasping the positions of the symbols of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R based on the reception of the detection signal of the reference position of the reels. In addition, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be derived, and winning determinations cannot be performed. That is, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The payout sensor 34c that detects medals to be paid out as a result of winning is a first electronic component that outputs a medal payout signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the medals. The main control unit 41 performs a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the generated winning based on the reception of the payout medal detection signal. Cannot be paid out. That is, the payout sensor 34c is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are second electronic components to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 is input. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and start the symbol variation display. Even if the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not actually rotated based on the above, the main control unit 41 receives the signals from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R after outputting the reel drive signals. The game can be controlled to proceed as the reel rotates. However, the timing at which signals are input from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R to the game control board 40 is an error unless the reel drive signal is output. In order to measure the output timing of a signal based on the detection of rotation, a reel drive signal is required. That is, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The hopper motor 34b for driving the hopper tank for paying out medals is a second electronic component to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 in response to the occurrence of a winning is input. This hopper motor 34b drives the hopper tank based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and pays out medals, but does not actually drive the hopper tank based on the signal input. Even if the main control unit 41 outputs the hopper tank drive signal and then receives the signal from the payout sensor 34c, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game as if the medal has been paid out. it can. However, the timing at which a signal is input to the game control board 40 from the payout sensor 34c is an error unless the hopper tank drive signal is output. Therefore, when the game is advanced by the driving tool described above, In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection, a driving signal for the hopper tank is required. That is, the hopper motor 34b is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34b, 34c and the door opening detection switch 25 are basically common to a plurality of models. Since the electronic parts are used continuously, there are few opportunities to remove and replace them from the main body unless a failure or the like occurs. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when the game control board 40 is removed, the game electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34b, 34c and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected. Since it is necessary to release the game electronic parts 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34b, 34c and the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 are relayed In addition to being connected via the boards, the boards and the boards are connected to the gaming electronic components and the door opening detection switch 25 via cables. The cable and the board are electrically connected by connecting a cable side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board.

  More specifically, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the door opening detection switch 25 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 100, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 100, and the effect control board 90 include the game control board 40 and the electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, Wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting 33R, 34b, and 34c are provided, and each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34b, It is possible to relay a detection signal output from 34c to the game control board 40 or power or a signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40.

  In addition, the game control board 40 is connected by wiring the various electronic components and the game control board 40 via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 as described above. From the above, it becomes easy to organize wiring with a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always provided on the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the connector connecting portion from being searched for during the wiring connecting operation, the wrong type of wiring to be connected, and the like.

  The game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected via a cable 600a, and the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120 are connected via a cable 600b, and the game control board 40 and the power supply board 100 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 600c, and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80 are connected via a cable 600d.

  The operation unit relay board 110 and the single BET switch 5 are connected via a cable 601a, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the MAXBET switch 6 are connected via a cable 601b, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the start switch 7 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 601c, the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8L are connected via a cable 601d, and the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8C are connected via a cable 601e. The board 110 and the stop switch 8R are connected via a cable 601f, the operation part relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 are connected via a cable 601g, and the operation part relay board 110 and the door open detection switch 25 are cables. It is connected via 601q.

  The reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32L are connected via a cable 601h, the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32C are connected via a cable 601j, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32R are connected to a cable 601l. Connected through. The reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected via a cable 601i, the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33C are connected via a cable 601k, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected to a cable 601m. Connected through. The power supply board 100 and the hopper motor 34b are connected via a cable 601n, the power supply board 100 and the payout sensor 34c are connected via a cable 601o, and the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 are connected to a cable 601p. Connected through.

  Each of these cables 600a to 600c, 601a to 601o, and 601q is connected to each board by a connector so that the wiring connection with the board can be released. Specifically, cable-side connectors 610a and 611a are provided at both ends of the cable 600a. One cable-side connector 610a is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620a fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 611a is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 621a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110. Cable side connectors 610b and 611b are provided at both ends of the cable 600b. One cable side connector 610b is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 620b fixed to the game control board 40, and the other side. The cable-side connector 611b is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621b fixed to the reel relay board 120. Cable-side connectors 610c and 611c are provided at both ends of the cable 600c. One cable-side connector 610c is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620c fixed to the game control board 40. The cable-side connector 611c is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621c fixed to the power supply board 100. Cable-side connectors 610d and 611d are provided at both ends of the cable 600d. One cable-side connector 610d is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620d fixed to the game control board 40, and the other The cable-side connector 611d is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621d fixed to the effect relay board 80.

  Further, a cable-side connector 612 a that can be connected to a board-side connector 622 a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601 a that has one end connected to the BET switch 5. At the other end of the cable 601b whose one end is connected to the MAXBET switch 6, a cable-side connector 612b that can be connected to the board-side connector 622b fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601c whose one end is connected to the start switch 7, a cable-side connector 612c that can be connected to the board-side connector 622c fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601d, one end of which is connected to the stop switch 8L, a cable side connector 612d that can be connected to the board side connector 622d fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601e whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8C, a cable-side connector 612e that can be connected to the board-side connector 622e fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601f whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8R, a cable-side connector 612f that can be connected to the board-side connector 622f fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. A cable-side connector 612g that can be connected to a board-side connector 622g fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601g that has one end connected to the inserted medal sensor 31. A cable-side connector 612q that can be connected to a board-side connector 622q fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601q whose one end is connected to the door opening detection switch 25.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601h whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32L and the other end of the cable 601i whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33L can be connected to the board-side connector 622h fixed to the reel relay board 120. A cable-side connector 612h is provided. A cable that can be connected to the board-side connector 622i fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601j whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32C and the other end of the cable 601k whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33C. A side connector 612i is provided. A cable connectable to a board-side connector 622j fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601l having one end connected to the reel motor 32R and the other end of the cable 601m connected to the reel sensor 33R. A side connector 612j is provided.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601n whose one end is connected to the hopper motor 34b and the other end of the cable 601o whose one end is connected to the payout sensor 34c are connectable to a board-side connector 622k fixed to the power supply board 100. A cable-side connector 612k is provided.

  In addition, cable-side connectors 612p and 613p are provided at both ends of the cable 601p. One cable-side connector 612p is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 622p fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 613p is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 623p fixed to the effect control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, wiring is extended from each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34b, 34c without a connector. However, it may be connected to wiring via a connector.

  As described above, each board and each cable includes board-side connectors 620a to 620d, 621a to 621d, 622a to 622k, 622p, and 623p provided on the board side, and cable-side connectors 610a to 610d provided on the cable side. Wiring is connected through a pair of connectors (male connector and female connector) consisting of 611a to 611d, 612a to 612k, 612p, and 613p, and the wiring connection is released by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector. Can be done. In particular, the game control board 40, the operation part relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power board 100, and the effect control board 90 are attached to predetermined locations on the casing or front door of the slot machine 1, so that the board side Since the cable side connector can be easily removed from the connector, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be easily replaced.

  First, the first electronic component will be described in detail. One of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, or the connector of a cable provided between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is driven into a connector. If the BET signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40, there is a possibility that the bet number is set even though the bet number setting operation is not performed. When a connector of a driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of a cable provided between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40, and a start signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40 There is a possibility that the game is started without performing the game start operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, and the stop signal is illegally transmitted from the driving tool to the game control board 40. If output, the rotation of the reel may be stopped without performing a stop operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R and the game control board 40, and the reel rotation signal is illegal from the driving tool to the game control board 40. Is output, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be derived and winning decisions may be performed without rotating the reels. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the payout sensor 34c and the game control board 40, and a medal payout signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40. There is a risk that the medals will be counted without paying out medals.

  The second electronic component will be described in detail. The game control board 40 is released by disconnecting one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the game control board 40. When the driving signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by the driving tool, the timing at which the driving signal of the reel is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving tool side, so game control is originally performed from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R. There is a possibility that the reel rotation detection signal input to the substrate 40 may be output from the driving tool at an appropriate timing after the reel rotation. In addition, the drive signal output from the game control board 40 after the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the hopper motor 34b and the game control board 40 is released can be obtained by a driving tool or the like. Then, since the timing at which the driving signal of the hopper tank is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving instrument side, the payout medal detection signal that is originally input from the payout sensor 34c to the game control board 40 is sent from the driving tool to the hopper tank. May be output at an appropriate timing after driving.

  In this way, a signal that is output from the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 34c according to the progress of the game and that is originally input to the game control board 40 is received. When output from the driving tool, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game based on the reception of the signal, and is output from the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When a signal input to the second electronic component 32L, 32C, 32R, 34b is input to the driving tool, on the driving tool side, an output timing of a signal output from the main control unit 41 after driving the reel motor or the hopper motor When a new signal is input to the game control board 40 based on this, the main control unit 41 receives the signal based on the reception of the signal. It is possible to perform control to proceed, there is a possibility that fraud such causes game automatically proceed is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures are taken to prevent fraud by connecting the driving tool.

Next, a configuration around the disconnection monitoring IC 50 in the game control board 40 will be described.
The game control board 40 is supplied with + 5V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit of the power supply board 100. The + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 100 is supplied to the power supply terminal (VDD) as a drive power supply for the disconnection monitoring IC 50, and also branches on the game control board 40 as shown in FIG. 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 via the cable 600a, the operation unit relay board 110, the operation unit relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 via the cable 601g, and then folded back by the insertion medal sensor 31, Returning to the game control board 40 via the cable 601g, the operation unit relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and further connecting the game control board 40 and the production relay board 80 to the cable 600d, the production relay board 80, and the production relay board 80 Via the cable 601p for wiring and connecting the effect control board 90, the effect control board 90 is further turned back. Te, cable 601P, directing the relay board 80, so that via the cable 600d to return to the game controller board 40 again, is input as a connection signal to the input terminal disconnection monitoring IC50 (IN).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a are connected, and the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are connected. Connection, connection between the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g, connection between the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, cable side of the cable 600d Connection between the connector 611d and the board-side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, connection between the board-side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable-side connector 612p of the cable 601p, and cable-side connector 613p of the cable 601p and production control The connection signal input to the input terminal (IN) of the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is interrupted by releasing any one of the connection of the board 90 and the board side connector 623p, and the disconnection monitoring IC 50 controls the game. Disconnections between the board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are detected. That is, if the connection between the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are released even at one place, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 detects the disconnection. It has come to be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 100 branches on the game control board 40 and is connected to the ground level on the power supply board 100 side. A capacitor C1 is provided. D1 is a diode for preventing backflow. As a result, a DC voltage of +5 V can be stored in the capacitor C1, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor C1 can be supplied as a backup power source for driving the disconnection monitoring IC 50. Thus, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can detect disconnection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 regardless of whether it is during energization or during a power failure. It has become.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the CPU 41a, and the information providing terminal board of the game store (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. 1010 is output to a hall device such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that a regular bonus is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is a big bonus, which will be described later, and the gaming state is a challenge time (although the number of sliding frames on the reel is limited, all small CT state signal indicating that a winning is allowed for a role), a CB medium signal indicating that a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time is present, a door opening signal indicating that the front door is open, A setting change signal indicating that the mode is changed to a setting change mode, which will be described later, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 Error signal is output, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, in the example, the challenge time and the challenge bonus are not installed, but in order to share with the slot machine equipped with these game states, the game control board 40 and the external output board 1000 A signal line for outputting a CT signal and a CB signal is connected between them, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, CT signal, and CB signal are directly provided as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. It is output to the terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, CT signal, and CB signal output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 converts the door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, payout error signal, (preliminary signal) into a serial signal in the data format shown in FIG. Output. The basic format consists of a pulse width of 20 ms and a frame length of 7 bits. The first bit is a start bit indicating the start of data, the last bit is a stop bit indicating the end of data, and D1 to D5 in between are transmission data. Become. The start bit is 1 (on) and the stop bit is 0 (off). D1 is a bit indicating the output state of the door opening signal. If 1 (on), it indicates a door opening signal on (when the front door 1b is open), and if it is 0 (off), the door opening signal off. Indicates. D2 is a bit indicating the output state of the setting change signal. If 1 (on), D2 indicates the setting change signal on (moving to the setting change mode), and 0 (off) indicates the setting change signal off. . D3 is a bit indicating the output state of the insertion error signal. If it is 1 (on), it indicates the insertion error signal on (it is highly likely that the medal selector has been cheated), and 0 (off). Indicates a throw error signal off. D4 is a bit indicating the output state of the payout error signal. If 1 (on), D4 indicates a payout error signal on (there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the hopper unit 34), and 0 (off). If there is, a payout error signal off is indicated. D5 is a bit indicating the output state of the spare signal, and is always 0 in the present embodiment. For example, if the door opening signal is on and the setting change signal is on, as shown in FIG. 7A, start bits: 1, D1: 1, D2: 1, D3: 0, D4: 0, D5 : 0, stop bit: 0. If the setting change signal changes to OFF after this state, the start bits are 1, D1: 1, D2: 0, D3: 0, D4: 0, D5: 0, and stop bits are 0. .

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 changes the output state of the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, the paying error signal, and the (preliminary signal), that is, when any event occurs or the event occurs. When is restored, a frame indicating the changed state is repeatedly transmitted three times.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, an interval of 240 ms is provided between the start bit and the start bit so as not to cause erroneous latching on the receiving side. That is, after the stop bit, a 100 ms blank is left and the start bit of the next frame is transmitted.

  Further, when the output state of the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, the payout error signal, and the (preliminary signal) is changed without completing the three repeated transmissions, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, a frame indicating the output state after the change is repeatedly transmitted three times from the next frame. At this time, there is no transmission of a new frame in the middle of frame output, or transmission of a new frame without a 100 ms blank after the stop bit. After a 100 ms blank, a new frame is transmitted, so that the reception side can reliably latch the head of the frame.

  Also, when any signal among the door opening signal, setting change signal, closing error signal, payout error signal, and (preliminary signal) changes from the on state to the off state, only the start bit is set to 1. The frame is transmitted three times.

  Next, the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90. As illustrated, the display control circuit 92 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 141 and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 142. The VDP 141 has a high-speed drawing function and a display output function for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51, and executes image processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control unit 91. The CGROM 142 stores image element data and moving image data (effect data) displayed as effects on the liquid crystal display 51.

  The VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, a CGROM interface 153, a drawing circuit 154, a temporary storage memory 155, a frame buffer memory 156, a display circuit 157, and a moving image decoder 158. Yes.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the sub-control unit 91. The transfer control circuit 152 performs control to transfer the effect data read from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on a command from the sub control unit 91. The CGROM interface 153 includes an address output terminal and a data input terminal for reading effect data stored in the CGROM 142.

  The drawing circuit 154 executes a drawing process for creating image data of an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the effect data stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The temporary storage memory 155 is composed of, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and includes an effect data area for storing effect data read from the CGROM 142. In addition, in the temporary storage memory 155, information indicating the type of mode for specifying an effect mode, which will be described later, or information indicating that a reel transparent object is set in the transparent area, based on a command from the sub-control unit 91, Information indicating that the transmissive area is made semi-transmissive is also stored.

  The frame buffer memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM that is different from the temporary storage memory 155, and stores image data of an image created by a drawing process by the drawing circuit 154. The frame buffer memory 156 has two frames, and switching between image data writing and reading is performed every frame period. The display circuit 157 uses the image data read from the frame buffer memory 156 (for reading) as gradation data, and outputs the image signal to which the synchronization signal is added to the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51. The moving picture decoder 158 is a circuit that decodes the moving picture data when it is read out from the CGROM 142 as effect data.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 41c of the game control board 40 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the storage area of the RAM 41c. As illustrated, the RAM 41c includes an important work 41c-1, a general work 41c-2, a special work 41c-3, a set value work 41c-4, a non-saved work 41c-5, a stack area 41c-6, and a parity storage area. A plurality of storage areas including 41c-7 and an unused area 41c-8 are provided.

  Among these storage areas, in particular, the set value work 41c-4 is an area for storing a set value for determining a winning probability of an internal winning which will be described later. The parity storage area 41c-7 is an area for storing the RAM parity when the power is turned off. Further, the RAM 41c is supplied with power by a backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and stores stored data.

  The general work 41c-2 is an area that is cleared at the end of each game, and a winning combination and a winning flag setting area for a small role and a replay are provided here. The special work 41c-3 is not cleared in a payout process to be described later for each game, and a flag indicating a gaming state to be described later and setting of a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus winning flag are set. A region is provided here.

  The stack area 41c-6 is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored. As the game progresses, an unused stack area in which no data is stored, that is, an unused stack area is stored. And a stack area in use. The stack area 41c-6 is assigned with an area corresponding to a predetermined start address to a final address among the areas of the RAM 41c. The in-use stack area is an area corresponding to the storage address where data is actually stored from the start address of the stack area 41c-6. The storage address is an address that changes every time data is stored. The unused stack area refers to an area corresponding to the address next to the storage address to the last address of the stack area 41c-6. The unused stack area of the stack area 41c-6 is an area that is cleared for each game (for example, at the start of the game) as described later.

  The unused area 41c-8 is an area that is not defined to be used without reading and writing data updated as the game progresses. This area is cleared at the time of start.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 4, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are arranged on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game state, but can be broadly divided into big bonuses (1) to (2), special bonuses with transition to regular bonuses, and small bonuses with medal payouts. There is a winning combination and a re-playing combination that allows the next game to be started without setting the bet amount. The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) may be simply referred to as a big bonus. The big bonus may be indicated as BB. The regular bonus may be indicated as RB. The big bonuses (1) to (2) and the regular bonus may be simply referred to as a bonus.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations in the slot machine 1, the combination of symbols in the variable display device 2, the bonus end condition, and other related matters.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), respectively.

  In the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the regular bonus for which the end condition is established by digesting one game until the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is ended is determined for each game. It is controlled repeatedly. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c, respectively. Further, during the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set to the ON state, when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started, The repeat regular bonus flag is set to ON.

  The big bonus (1) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 406 or more. On the other hand, the big bonus (2) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 271 or more.

  After the big bonus (2) ends, the gaming state is controlled to the initial gaming state. On the other hand, after the big bonus (1) ends, the gaming state is controlled to RT where the winning probability of replay is higher than that in the initial gaming state until 100 games are consumed or the bonus is won.

  As will be described later, it may be controlled by the AT that notifies the winning situation on the condition that it is controlled by RT. Control to the AT is continued until the predetermined number of games is consumed or RT is finished.

  Also, when the big bonus (1) is won, when the big bonus (2) is won, after the big bonus (1) is finished by paying out 406 or more medals, and 271 big bonuses (2) are given. After the completion of paying out medals, the player is controlled for a certain period of time in a frozen state in which any operation of the player becomes invalid and the progress of the game is disabled, except for credit settlement. In addition, when the stop function is set to be effective and the Big Bonus (1) or the Big Bonus (2) is terminated by paying out the prescribed number, any operation of the player except for the payment of credit is performed. Control is performed until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to a disabled state in which the game is disabled and the progress of the game is disabled.

  Even if the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, these I won't win a role. This is because the symbols constituting each of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. However, if the winning combination has not been won because the player has not been operated at an appropriate timing, a predetermined chance (in terms of winning) may be derived.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c, and the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus. When a regular bonus is won, the game ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 120 or more.

  In addition, when the regular bonus is won and after the regular bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a freeze state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible for a certain period of time. . In addition, when the regular bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are disabled except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated.

  Even if a regular bonus is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will not win these roles. This is because the symbols constituting the regular bonus are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. However, if the winning combination has not been won because the player has not been operated at an appropriate timing, a predetermined chance (in terms of winning) may be derived.

  As will be described later, with regard to the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the red cherry of the small role is simultaneously read out as a lottery target role and an internal lottery is performed. Therefore, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus are each won in duplicate with the red cherry.

  Hereinafter, there is a case where “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery. For example, the notation “Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry” indicates that Big Bonus (1) and Red Cherry are simultaneously read as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  Grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines, and 15 medals are paid out per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT.

  As a general rule, grapes can be awarded regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. This is because the symbols “grape” constituting the grapes are arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L to 2R that establish a grape winning.

  Bananas are awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any winning line, and 10 medals are paid out per winning line in the initial game state and RT. When a banana is won during a big bonus or a regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out per winning line.

  The red cherry is awarded when the “red cherry” symbol is derived on any winning line for the left reel 2L in any gaming state, and three medals per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT. To be paid out.

  Black Cherry is awarded when the “Black Cherry” symbol is derived on any winning line for the left reel 2L in any gaming state, and three medals per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT. To be paid out.

  When “red cherry” or “black cherry” stops on the upper or lower tier of the left reel 2L, it is derived from two winning lines (winning lines L1 and L3, or winning lines L2 and L4). Medals are paid out. Also, when a red cherry or black cherry is won during a big bonus or a regular bonus, eight medals are paid out per winning line. Even if a red cherry or black cherry is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, no winning will be won. The red cherry will be won if the “red cherry” of the left reel 2L is stopped on any of the winning lines, but there is an area where the “red cherry” is not arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L. This is because it exists. Similarly, for black cherry, there is an area where “black cherry” is not arranged within 7 frames in the left reel 2L.

  As will be described later, the black cherry is read as a lottery target combination at the same time as the red cherry in the internal lottery. Therefore, black cherries will be won in duplicate with red cherries.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. In principle, the replay can be awarded regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. This is because the symbol “melon” constituting the replay is arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  When winning a replay, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game (the number of bets set for the replay winning game) ) Is substantially the same as a medal corresponding to).

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above-described winning combination (derivation of a winning display result) is allowed is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2 is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). , To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the acquired random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the situation.

  In the ROM 41b described above, a winning combination table used for determining a combination determined to be a winning in the internal lottery is stored in advance. The registered content of the winning combination table indicates a predetermined combination. In each game, a combination that is a lottery target is referred to. The winning combination table in the present embodiment is stored in the ROM 41b, and a predetermined combination is read out as a lottery target.

  Specifically, in the winning combination table, when the gaming state is the initial gaming state, big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (2) + red cherry, regular bonus + red cherry, grape, banana, red cherry , Red cherry + black cherry, and replay are sequentially read out as lottery targets.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the target part of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the target part is won. Is done. If the winning combination is determined, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c. A winning flag corresponding to the winning situation is set in the RAM 41c. Further, when a winning combination is determined when a plurality of winning combinations are read as lottery winning combinations, a winning flag corresponding to each of the read winning combinations is set in the RAM 41c. For example, when the big bonus (1) + red cherry is read out as the lottery object and it is determined that the winning is made, the winning flag for the big bonus (1) and the winning flag for the red cherry are set in the RAM 41c.

  The number of determination values is read in accordance with the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role table stored in advance in the ROM 41b. The number of determination values for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. This number of determination values is stored in the RAM 41c in the development model and in a storage area provided in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the mass production model.

  FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is the initial gaming state. For example, when the set value is 1, “94” is regular when the subject in the internal lottery is big bonus (1) + red cherry, and “94” is regular when big bonus (2) + red cherry. “94” when bonus + red cherry, “5461” when grape, “655” when banana, “437” when red cherry, “red cherry + black cherry” “94” is acquired as the number of determination values when there is a certain time, and “8977” when it is a replay. FIG. 11A similarly shows the number of determination values for each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the larger the value set as the set value, the larger the number of determination values acquired in the big bonuses (1) and (2) and the internal bonus lottery. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery. Further, the larger the value set as the set value, the larger the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of grape, banana, red cherry, red cherry + black cherry. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is in RT. When the game state is RT, Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Regular Bonus + Red Cherry, Grape, Banana, Red Cherry, Red Cherry + Black Cherry, Replay in order It is comprised so that it may be read as a lottery object combination.

  For example, when the set value is 1, the target lottery of the internal lottery is “38000” as the number of determination values when it is replay, and when it is a combination other than replay, the determination value shown in FIG. The same number as the number is acquired (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11B).

  Here, regarding the probability of winning the replay, when comparing the initial gaming state and the RT state, it becomes 8966 / 65536≈13.6% in the initial gaming state, and 38000 / in the RT state. The number of determination values is set to be 65536≈57.9%. As described above, the number of determination values is set so that the probability of winning a replay is extremely higher in RT than in the initial gaming state. For the other combinations, the same number of determination values as that in the initial gaming state is set. For this reason, RT can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player in that the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the initial game state.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is in a regular bonus. When the game state is a regular bonus (including a regular bonus provided during a big bonus), it is configured so that grapes, bananas, red cherries, red cherries + black cherries are sequentially read out as lottery targets. . For example, when the set value is 1, when the target combination of the internal lottery is grape, “59578” is acquired as the number of determination values, and when the combination is a combination other than grapes, the determination value shown in FIG. The same number as the number is acquired (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11C). In this way, the number of determination values is set so that the probability of winning the small role (grape) is higher in the regular bonus than in the initial gaming state. For this reason, the regular bonus can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than in the initial gaming state.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table index stored in the ROM 41b. As shown in the figure, the table index stores the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored for each internal winning situation.

  Even if the internal winning situation is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored. In such a case, The stop control table is created with reference to the same table creation data. Here, the table creation data is made up of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and the address of the drawn-in frame number data to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referred according to the reel stop status is whether all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, only the left reel 2L is stopped, only the middle reel 2C is stopped, or the right reel Depending on whether only 2R is stopped, left and middle reels 2L and 2C are stopped, left and right reels 2L and 2R are stopped, and middle and right reels 2C and 2R are stopped. In addition, in a situation where any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel.

  In the table creation data, the address of the drawing frame number data to be referred to is registered for each reel being rotated for each situation. The address of the number of frames to be drawn that should be referred to according to each situation can be specified based on the top address of the table creation data. From this specified address, the number of frames to be drawn that are necessary for each situation can be obtained. It can be specified. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of frames to be drawn when the same number of frames to be drawn is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  In addition, the number of drawn frames data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. As the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, stepping motors that make one round with a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 2) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  The stop control table is created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above. In the stop control table, corresponding to the area numbers 0 to 20, the timing corresponding to each area number is the timing (reel) at which the area corresponding to each area number is positioned at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area). The number of frames to be drawn when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing at which the number of steps from the reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning situation in the game is acquired. Then, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired head address, and the address of the drawing frame number data of each reel corresponding to the state where all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating is acquired from the specified table creation data. Then, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is developed to create a stop control table for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Also, when any one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped or when any two are stopped, a table is created according to the top address acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the internal winning situation in the game. The table creation data is identified based on the start address of the data, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn in the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. Then, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described.

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol Will stop in the area).

  In addition, the table index stores only one address as the top address of the table creation data storage area corresponding to one internal winning situation in one gaming state. Is stored with only one address as the address of the storage area of the number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning status, and the number of frames to be drawn corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The created stop control table is also unique for one internal winning situation and reel stop situation (and stop position of a stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the internal winning status and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Will be performed.

  In addition, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In addition, in the table index, the number of drawn-in frames is drawn so that the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and no winning combination is arranged, corresponding to the case where any combination is won. Stores the address of the predetermined table creation data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel is controlled to be stopped.

  In addition, the table index stores the address of table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn in is determined so that none of the roles are arranged, corresponding to the case of loss. For this reason, in the case of a loss, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn that do not have any combination is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the winning combination. The symbol of the winning combination is controlled so as to be removed and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In addition, the table index includes a range of 4 replays corresponding to the case where a replay player is elected with a special role carried over from the previous game (such as big bonus (1) and replay). Thus, the address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be drawn to the maximum is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. When the special combination and the replay are won at the same time, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the re-game combination will always be awarded. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In the case of winning the replay, as a stop control table for all reels, the stop control in which the number of frames to be drawn is specified to specify the symbols constituting the replay selected for all the area numbers as the display result. A table is created and stop control of all reels is performed.

  In the table index, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time (big bonus (1) + red cherry, etc.), or when a special role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game ( Corresponding to the big bonus (1) and grapes, regular bonus and banana etc.), the number of draws is determined so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning special role is For the stop operation position that cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames, the address of the table creation data in which the number of drawn frames is determined so that the selected small role is drawn in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is stored. Stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the symbol of the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it is possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be withdrawn (when winning is not possible). Become.

  Here, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio according to the number of “red cherry” symbols stopped on the reel control and one pay line when at least red cherry is won will be described with reference to FIGS. To do. FIG. 13 is for explaining the stop operation position at an appropriate timing at which red cherry can be won and the stop position of the “red cherry” symbol when the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing for each winning situation. FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the ratio at which the “red cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L stops on the winning line when at least a red cherry is won. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when a red cherry is won and when a plurality of “red cherries” symbols are stopped on one pay line. FIG. 16 shows the winning ratio of the “red cherry” symbols of other reels stopped on the 1 winning line when the “red cherry” symbols of at least 1 reel are stopped on the 1 winning line. It is a figure for demonstrating for every situation. FIG. 17 shows a symbol that is a timing at which a “red cherry” symbol can be theoretically drawn into one winning line by operating a stop switch when displayed at the bottom, a symbol that is a timing that can actually be drawn, It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the stop control table created.

  First, referring to FIG. 13, the stop operation position at an appropriate timing at which red cherry can be won and the stop position of the “red cherry” symbol when the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing are selected. Each will be explained. In FIG. 13, the area where symbol number 4 to symbol number 17 is arranged is extracted from the left reel 2 </ b> L, and “red cherry” of symbol number 12 is operated by operating the stop switch 8 </ b> L when displayed in the lower row. The symbol number of the symbol at the stop operation position at which the symbol can be drawn on the winning line is enclosed by a square. Further, in FIG. 13, the right side of the symbol indicates that the stop switch 8L is operated when the symbol at the stop operation position where the “red cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line is displayed in the lower row. The symbol “•” indicates that the symbol “•” indicates that the stop switch 8L is to be stopped when the stop switch 8L is operated. The symbol “○” indicates that the reel 2L is rotated from the “•” symbol to the “O” symbol. An arrow indicates that the pull-in control is performed. In the upper part of the “◯” mark, the position where the “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 stops is shown.

  FIG. 13 (a) shows a stop operation position and an appropriate timing when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, when the red cherry is winning alone and when winning simultaneously with the black cherry. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop position of the "red cherry" symbol when stop operation is performed at this appropriate timing.

  As described above, since a symbol of up to 4 frames can be drawn after the stop switch is operated, for example, when the symbol displayed in the lower row is used as a reference, it is within the range of 7 frames including the symbol. The arranged symbols can be stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, the appropriate timing when the red cherry is elected alone is that the stop switch 8L is displayed in the lower row with the symbol “red cherry” placed within 7 frames in the left reel 2L. The timing at which the symbols of symbol numbers 6 to 12 (see the square box in the diagram) are displayed in the lower row corresponds.

  In addition, the right timing when the red cherry is won simultaneously with the black cherry is the same as the symbols 6 to 12 that are the same as when the red cherry is won alone (see the square box in the figure) ) Is displayed at the bottom. As shown in FIG. 2, the “red cherry” symbol and the “black cherry” symbol are not arranged within 7 frames on the reel 2L. This is because there is no overlap with the proper timing.

  When the red cherry is selected alone and when the black cherry is simultaneously selected, and the stop switch 8L is operated while the “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 is displayed in the lower row The reel 2L is stopped as it is, and the “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 is stopped and displayed.

  When the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbols of symbol numbers 9 to 11 are displayed in the lower row, the “red cherry” symbol of the symbol number 12 is drawn into the lower row and stopped, and the symbol number in the lower row. Twelve “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbols of symbol numbers 6 to 8 are displayed in the lower row, the “grape” symbol of the symbol number 10 is pulled down and stopped, and the symbol number 12 in the upper row is stopped. The “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, the stop operation position that is the appropriate timing for winning the red cherry when the red cherry is won alone and at the same time as the black cherry is the 21 symbols arranged on the left reel 2L. Among these, the position where 7 symbols are arranged corresponds. In addition, among the 7 symbols, the position where 4 symbols are arranged is a stop operation position where the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and the position where 3 symbols are arranged is “red cherry” in the upper row. This is the stop operation position where the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 14, when the red cherry is won alone and when the black cherry is simultaneously won, and when the left reel 2L is first stopped, the “red cherry” symbol is For the distribution ratio distributed to the middle and lower, if you did not press the so-called stop operation at the right time to win the red cherry, and the stop operation at the right time to win the red cherry The case where it is pushed to become will be described. In FIG. 14, the winning status is shown in the left column, and the ratio at which the “red cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L stops on the winning line according to the winning status is shown.

  When the red cherries are elected alone and the first reel is stopped without looking at the left reel 2L, the “red cherries” symbol is displayed in the upper row at a ratio of 3/21. And stopped and displayed in the lower row at a ratio of 4/21. Similarly, regarding the distribution rate when the red cherry is elected simultaneously with the black cherry, “red cherry” is stopped and displayed at the upper stage at a ratio of 3/21, and at a ratio of 4/21. The stop is displayed at the bottom.

  In addition, when the red cherry is won alone and the left reel 2L is pushed to stop for the first time, the “red cherry” symbol is displayed in the upper row at a rate of 3/7. And stopped and displayed in the lower row at a rate of 4/7. Similarly, with regard to the allocation rate when the red cherry is simultaneously elected with the black cherry, the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper row at a rate of 3/7, and the rate of 4/7 Is stopped and displayed at the bottom. Note that the “red cherry” symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle when the red cherry is won alone and simultaneously with the black cherry.

  In this way, regardless of whether or not the player is pushing, when red cherry is winning alone and when winning simultaneously with black cherry and left reel 2L is first stopped, The reel control is performed so that the “cherry” symbol is not stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and the ratio of the stop display at the lower stage is higher than the ratio at which it is stopped and displayed at the upper stage.

  FIG. 13B shows the stop operation position and the proper timing when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time and when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (1). It is a figure for demonstrating the stop position of the "red cherry" symbol when stop operation is performed.

  The “Red Cherry” symbol and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the big bonus (1) in the left reel 2L are not arranged within 7 frames, and the appropriate timing and big bonus (1 ) There is no overlap with the proper timing for winning. Therefore, the appropriate timing for winning the red cherry when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (1) is the same as the symbol numbers 6 to 12 when the red cherry is won alone. This corresponds to the timing when the symbol (see the square box in the figure) is displayed in the lower row.

  When the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (1) and the stop switch 8L is operated while the “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 is displayed in the lower row, the reel 2L is left as it is. The “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 is stopped and displayed in the lower row. When the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbol of symbol number 11 is displayed in the lower row, the “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 is pulled into the lower row and stopped, and the symbol “12 of symbol number 12 in the lower row is stopped. The “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped.

  When the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbols of symbol numbers 9 to 10 are displayed in the lower row, the “star” symbol of symbol number 11 is drawn into the lower row and stopped, and the symbol number 12 is moved to the middle row. The “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the stop switch 8L is operated when the symbols of symbol numbers 6 to 8 are displayed in the lower row, the “grape” symbol of symbol number 10 is pulled in to the lower row and stopped, and the symbol number 12 is moved to the upper row. The “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (1), the stop operation position at the appropriate timing for winning the red cherry is 7 symbols out of 21 symbols arranged on the left reel 2L. The position where is arranged corresponds. In addition, among the 7 symbols, the position where the 2 symbols are arranged becomes the stop operation position where the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle row for the 2 symbols. It becomes the operation position, and it becomes a stop operation position for stopping and displaying the “red cherry” symbol on the upper stage for the three symbols.

  FIG. 13C shows the stop operation position and the proper timing when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time and when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (2). It is a figure for demonstrating the stop position of the "red cherry" symbol when stop operation is performed.

  In the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol and the “white 7” symbol constituting the big bonus (2) are arranged within 7 frames, so that the appropriate timing and big bonus (2 ) It overlaps with the proper timing for winning. Therefore, when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (2), the timing at which the “white 7” symbols constituting the big bonus (2) can be drawn (for example, the symbols of symbol numbers 11 to 12 are in the lower row. At the displayed timing), the drawing of the “white 7” symbol is prioritized, and the “red cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L cannot be drawn on the winning line. As a result, the appropriate timing for winning the red cherry when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (2) is the symbols of symbol numbers 6 to 10 (see the square box in the diagram). The timing displayed in the lower row is applicable.

  When the red cherry is won at the same time as the big bonus (2), and the stop switch 8L is operated when the symbol of symbol number 10 is displayed in the lower row, the symbol “red cherry” of symbol number 12 is displayed. The symbol is drawn to the lower stage and displayed in a stopped state.

  When the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbol number 9 is displayed in the lower row, the “star” symbol of symbol number 11 is drawn into the lower row and stopped, and the “red” symbol number 12 in the middle row is stopped. The “Cherry” symbol is stopped.

  In addition, when the stop switch 8L is operated when the symbols of symbol numbers 6 to 8 are displayed in the lower row, the “grape” symbol of symbol number 10 is pulled in to the lower row and stopped, and the symbol number 12 is moved to the upper row. The “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (2), the stop operation position at the appropriate timing for winning the red cherry is 5 symbols out of 21 symbols arranged on the left reel 2L. The position where is arranged corresponds. In addition, among the 5 symbols, the position where 1 symbol is arranged is a stop operation position where the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and the position where 1 symbol is arranged is “red cherry” in the middle row. The stop operation position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is the position where the three symbols are arranged, and the stop operation position where the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper stage.

  FIG. 13D shows the time when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, and the stop operation position at the proper timing when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the regular bonus and the stop operation at the proper timing. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop position of the "red cherry" symbol when it was performed.

  In the left reel 2L, the “Red Cherry” symbol and the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus are arranged within 7 frames. Therefore, the proper timing for winning the red cherry and the proper bonus for winning the regular bonus are shown. The timing overlaps. For this reason, when red cherries are won simultaneously with the regular bonus, the timing at which the “BAR” symbol making up the regular bonus can be drawn (for example, when the symbols of symbol numbers 6 to 8 are displayed in the lower row). If so, the drawing of the “BAR” symbol is given priority, and the “red cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L cannot be drawn on the winning line. As a result, the appropriate timing for winning the red cherry when the red cherry is selected at the same time as the regular bonus is displayed in the lower row of symbols 9 to 12 (see the box in the box). The corresponding timing is applicable.

  When the red cherry is won at the same time as the regular bonus, and the stop switch 8L is operated while the “red cherry” symbol of symbol number 12 is displayed in the lower row, the left reel 2L stops as it is. Then, “Red Cherry” of the symbol number 12 is stopped and displayed in the lower row.

  Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbol of symbol number 11 is displayed in the lower row, the left reel 2L is stopped as it is, the “star” symbol of the symbol number 11 is stopped in the lower row, and the symbol number Twelve “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle.

  Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbol of symbol number 10 is displayed in the lower row, the left reel 2L is stopped as it is, the “grape” symbol of symbol number 10 is stopped in the lower row, and the symbol number Twelve “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper row. Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated while the symbol of symbol number 9 is displayed in the lower row, the “grape” symbol of symbol number 10 is drawn into the lower row and stopped, and “red cherry” of symbol number 12 is stopped. The symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper row.

  Therefore, 4 symbols out of the 21 symbols arranged on the left reel 2L are arranged as the stop operation position that is an appropriate timing for winning the red cherry when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the regular bonus. Applicable position. In addition, among the four symbols, the position where one symbol is arranged is a stop operation position for stopping and displaying the “red cherry” symbol in the lower row, and the position where one symbol is arranged is “red cherry” in the middle row. The stop operation position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is the position where the two symbols are arranged, and the stop operation position where the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper stage.

  Here, referring to FIG. 14, when the red cherry is simultaneously elected with any one of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, and when the left reel 2L is stopped first. For the distribution ratio of the “Red Cherry” symbol to the top, middle, and bottom, if you did not press the so-called stop operation at the right time to win the red cherry, and to win the red cherry A case where the user presses the stop operation at an appropriate timing will be described.

  When the red cherry is in the winning situation at the same time as the big bonus (1) and the first stop is made without pushing the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is a ratio of 3/21 Is stopped and displayed at the upper stage, stopped at the middle stage at a ratio of 2/21, and stopped at the lower stage at a ratio of 2/21. In addition, when the red cherry is in the winning situation at the same time as the big bonus (1) and the left reel 2L is pushed to stop for the first time, the “red cherry” symbol is 3/7. Stopped at the upper level at a rate, stopped at the middle level at a rate of 2/7, and stopped at the lower level at a rate of 2/7.

  When the red cherry is in the winning situation when the big bonus (2) is won at the same time and the first stop is made without pushing the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is a ratio of 3/21 Is stopped and displayed in the upper row, stopped in the middle row at a rate of 1/21, and stopped and displayed in the lower row at a rate of 1/21. In addition, when the red cherry is in the winning situation where the big bonus (2) is won at the same time and the left reel 2L is pushed to stop for the first time, the “red cherry” symbol is 3/5. Stopped and displayed at the upper level at a rate, stopped and displayed at the middle level at a rate of 1/5, and stopped and displayed at the lower level at a rate of 1/5.

  When the red cherry is in the winning situation at the same time as the regular bonus, and the first stop is made without pushing the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol will rise to the top in the ratio of 2/21 Stopped and displayed in the middle row at a rate of 1/21, and stopped and displayed in the lower row at a rate of 1/21. In addition, when the red cherry is in a winning situation at the same time as the regular bonus, and when the first reel 2L is stopped by pushing the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is in the upper row at a rate of 2/4. Is stopped and displayed at the middle level at a rate of 1/4 and stopped at the lower level at a rate of 1/4.

  In this way, regardless of whether or not the player has been pushing, the left cherry 2L can be used when the red cherry is simultaneously elected with one of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. When the first stop is performed, there is a case where the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage at a predetermined distribution ratio, and the ratio of the stop display in the upper stage is higher than the ratio of the stop display in the lower stage. Thus, the reel control is performed.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 15A and 15B, the appearance ratio of the “red cherry” symbol appearing on the winning line when the left reel 2L is first stopped, the stop of the “red cherry” symbol. The bonus simultaneous winning ratio for each position and the bonus non-winning ratio for each stop position of the “red cherry” symbol will be described. FIG. 15A shows the ratio when the eye is not pressed, and FIG. 15B shows the ratio when the eye is pressed. In addition, the appearance ratio is the distribution ratio of each “red cherry” symbol distributed to the upper, middle, and lower tiers when the appearance described with reference to FIG. 14 is not performed and when the appearance is performed. The ratio of the “red cherry” symbol to be stopped in each of the upper, middle and lower stages per game is determined based on the probability of winning corresponding to the winning situation (winning probability of setting value 1, shown in parentheses in the left column of FIG. 14). Show. In addition, the bonus simultaneous winning percentage indicates the percentage that the “Red Cherry” symbol is simultaneously elected to the bonus when the “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped in each of the upper, middle and lower tiers. Shows the percentage of bonuses that are not won at the same time.

  When not pressed, the appearance ratio of “red cherry” symbols appearing in the upper, middle, and lower tiers as shown in FIG. 15A is as follows.

Appearance ratio in the upper row ... 23/12600 ≒ 0.182%
Appearance ratio of middle stage ... 4/12600 ≒ 0.031%
Appearance ratio in the lower row ... 24/12600 ≒ 0.190%
In addition, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when the “red cherry” symbol appears at the appearance ratio as described above is as follows.

Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of upper appearance ... 8/23 ≒ 34.7%
Bonus simultaneous winning ratio when middle row appears ... 4/4 ≒ 100%
Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of the lower appearance ... 4/24 ≒ 16.6%
In addition, the bonus non-winning ratio when the “red cherry” symbol appears at the above-described appearance ratio is as follows.

Bonus non-winning rate at the time of the upper appearance ... 15/23 ≒ 65.3%
Bonus non-winning ratio at the time of middle appearance ... 0/4 ≒ 0%
Bonus non-winning rate at the time of the lower appearance ... 20/24 ≒ 83.4%
In addition, when the eye is pressed, as shown in FIG. 15B, the appearance ratio of the “red cherry” symbols appearing in the upper, middle, and lower tiers is as follows. In addition, in the calculation formula shown in FIG. 15B, the appearance ratio is obtained after the numerator denominator is multiplied by one so that the distribution ratio in each of the upper, middle, and lower stages is “140” that is a common multiple of the denominator. .

Appearance ratio of upper row: 514/84000 ≒ 0.611%
Appearance ratio of middle stage ... 103/84000 ≒ 0.122%
Appearance ratio in the lower row ... 503/84000 ≒ 0.598%
As described above, the appearance ratio when the eye is pressed is higher than the appearance ratio shown in FIG. 15A when the eye is not pressed because the missed red cherry is reduced.

  In addition, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when the “red cherry” symbol appears at the appearance ratio as described above is as follows.

Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the top appearance ... 214/514 ≒ 41.6%
Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of middle appearance ... 103/103 ≒ 100%
Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of the lower tier ... 103/503 ≒ 20.4%
In addition, the bonus non-winning ratio when the “red cherry” symbol appears at the above-described appearance ratio is as follows.

Bonus non-winning rate at the time of the upper appearance ... 300/514 ≒ 58.4%
Bonus non-winning ratio at the time of middle appearance ... 0/103 ≒ 0%
Bonus non-winning ratio at the time of the lower tier ... 400/503 ≒ 79.6%
From the relationship between the appearance ratio, bonus simultaneous winning ratio, and bonus non-winning ratio, the following can be confirmed. First, regardless of whether or not he / she pressed, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when the “red cherry” symbol stops in the middle is 100%. Therefore, when the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 2L, the player can be made aware that the bonus has been won simultaneously. Regardless of whether or not the player is pushing, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio is higher when the “red cherry” symbol is stopped at the upper stage than when it is stopped at the lower stage. For this reason, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, a bonus is simultaneously won to the player when the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper stage, rather than when it is stopped and displayed at the upper stage. I can have a greater sense of expectation for

  As described above, the reel control and the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time when the red cherry has been won have been described. Next, when the red cherry is at least won and the “red cherry” symbol is already stopped on the winning line and the other reels are stopped, the reels are controlled at the same time, and the bonus is determined accordingly. Explain the winning percentage.

  As described above, the stop control table for the rotating reel is created according to the internal winning status and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In this embodiment, when the red cherry is won at least and the “red cherry” symbol of at least one reel is stopped and displayed on one winning line, A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is set so that the ratio of stopping the “red cherry” symbol on the winning line becomes the ratio described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 16, when at least one reel is stopped and one or two “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line, a stop switch is displayed when the rotating reel is displayed in the lower row. When the “Red Cherry” symbol can be theoretically drawn on the one winning line by operating (maximum four-frame pulling as described above, taking into consideration the symbol priority drawing of the winning combination when winning the winning combination, etc.) The ratio of the number of frames to be drawn that actually stops the “red cherry” symbol on the one winning line of the X symbols when there are X symbols that can be drawn in) Is shown for each winning situation. That is, FIG. 16 shows the case where at least one reel is stopped and one or two “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line, and the “red cherry” symbols of other reels are displayed. The percentage of actual withdrawals that are stopped when one draws to a winning line at a timing that can be theoretically drawn in is shown for each winning situation.

  Referring to FIG. 16A, when at least one reel is stopped and one “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on one pay line, the “red cherry” symbol is pressed for another reel. When the red cherry is winning at the same time as the big bonus (1), the “red cherry” symbols of the other reels are drawn onto the 1 winning line at a rate of about 90/100. As a result, two “red cherries” symbols are stopped and displayed on the 1 winning line. Similarly, when at least one reel is stopped and one “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on one pay line, when the “red cherry” symbol is pressed for another reel, When the winning status is winning at the same time as the big bonus (2), the rate is about 70/100. When the winning status is red cherry winning at the same time as the regular bonus, the rate is about 50/100. When the winning situation is that the cherry is winning alone, the ratio is about 5/100, and when the red cherry is winning simultaneously with the black cherry, the ratio is about 30/100, and the other reels. The “red cherry” symbol is drawn on the 1 winning line, and as a result, the two “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on the 1 winning line. In addition, when red cherry is won alone and when bonus is not won at the same time as black cherry, and when the left reel 2L is stopped, the “red cherry” symbol is displayed in the middle Reel control is performed so as not to stop display.

  Next, referring to FIG. 16B, when the second reel is stopped and two “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on the first pay line, the “red cherry” symbols are displayed for the other reels. When it is pressed and the red cherry is winning at the same time as the big bonus (1), the “red cherry” symbols of the other reels are on the 1 winning line at a ratio of about 90/100. As a result, three “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on the 1 winning line. Similarly, when 2 reels stop and 2 “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on 1 winning line, when “red cherry” symbols are pressed for other reels, When the winning situation is won at the same time as the big bonus (2), the rate is about 70/100, and when the red cherry is won at the same time as the regular bonus, the rate is about 50/100. The “red cherry” symbols of the other reels are drawn onto the 1 winning line, and as a result, the 3 “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on the 1 winning line. When 2 reels are stopped and 2 “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on 1 winning line, when “Red Cherry” symbol is pressed for other reels, If you are winning at the same time, and if you are not winning at the same time as the bonus when you are simultaneously elected with black cherry, the “red cherry” symbol of the other reels will not be drawn on the 1st prize line, The reel control is performed so that three symbols are not stopped and displayed on the winning line with 1 symbol. When the red cherry is simultaneously won with the regular bonus, the reel control is performed so that three “red cherry” symbols are not stopped and displayed on the single pay line in the pay lines L2 and L5. Further, when the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (2), the reel control is performed so that three “red cherries” symbols are not stopped and displayed on the single pay line in the pay line L5. As a result, when three “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line, the player can recognize that one of the bonuses has been won. Further, when three “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one winning line and the winning line is L2 or L5, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2 ) Can be recognized by the player. In addition, when three “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line, and the pay line is L5, it is determined that the big bonus (1) is won. The player can be recognized.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “red cherry” symbol of at least one reel is stopped and displayed on one winning line, the “reel control” table of the other reel is used as the stop control table for the other reel. The number of frames to be drawn is set so that the ratio of stopping the “red cherry” symbol on the one winning line when the “red cherry” symbol is pressed is the rate described in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). A stop control table is created and reel control is performed. In addition, the ratio described in FIGS. 16A and 16B is greater when the red cherry is simultaneously won with any bonus than when the red cherry is not simultaneously won with the bonus. It is set so that the ratio of drawing the “red cherry” symbol on one winning line is high.

  Here, by operating the stop switch when it is displayed in the lower row, the symbol that is the timing at which the “red cherry” symbol can be theoretically drawn into one winning line, is explained with reference to FIGS. 16A and 16B. With reference to FIG. 17, a specific description will be given of an example of a symbol that is a timing that can be actually pulled in, and a generated stop control table.

  In FIG. 17, the symbols of symbol numbers 10 to 12 of the left reel 2L are stopped, the “red cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L is stopped and displayed on the winning lines L1 and L3, and the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R rotate. It is a figure when it is in. In such a state, the “red cherry” symbol can be theoretically drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 by operating the stop switch 8C when the lower middle reel 2C is displayed at the lower stage. There are a total of 18 symbols (symbols 0 to 5 and 9 to 20) with reference to the arrangement of reels 2C in FIG. Among these, since the number of symbols at which the “red cherry” symbol can actually be drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 becomes a value close to the ratio according to the winning situation described in FIG. Red Cherry is a regular bonus when it is elected at the same time as the Big Bonus (1), 17 Red Cherry is elected at the same time as the Big Bonus (2), a Red Bonus is a regular bonus Nine are set when the winning status is selected at the same time, one is set when the red cherry is selected alone, and six are set when the red cherry is simultaneously selected with the black cherry. Will be. Note that the number of symbols at which the “red cherry” symbol can actually be drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 is the number of symbols that is close to the proportion corresponding to the winning situation described in FIG. Well, for example, the number of symbols when the red cherry is winning at the same time as the big bonus (1) is not limited to 17, but may be 16 which is less than 90/100.

  Therefore, for the middle reel 2C in the state of FIG. 17, the timing at which the “red cherry” symbol can actually be drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 by operating the stop switch 8C when displayed in the lower row. For example, when the red cherry wins the big bonus (1) and the winning situation is the winning situation, the symbols 0-5 and 10-20, the red cherry wins the big bonus (2) at the same time. If the winning situation is the symbols 1 to 4, 11 to 19 and the red cherry is winning at the same time as the regular bonus, the symbols 2 to 3 and 12 to 18 are the red cherry When the winning situation is winning independently, it is the winning situation where the symbol No. 3 and red cherry are winning simultaneously with the black cherry It can become a symbol of the symbol number 3,13～17 in. Then, as the stop control table for the middle reel 2C in the state of FIG. 17, when the stop switch 8C is operated while these symbols are displayed in the lower row, the “red cherry” symbol is used as the winning line L1. Alternatively, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn into L3 is defined is created.

  Further, in the state of FIG. 17, the “red cherry” symbol is theoretically drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 by operating the stop switch 8R when the rotating right reel 2R is displayed in the lower row. There are a total of twelve symbols, symbol numbers 0 to 3, 12 to 17, 19, and 20, referring to the arrangement of the right reel 2R in FIG. Among these, since the number of symbols at which the “red cherry” symbol can actually be drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 becomes a value close to the ratio according to the winning situation described in FIG. 11 red cherries are winning at the same time as the big bonus (1), 9 red cherries are winning at the same time as the big bonus (2), red cherries are regular bonuses 6 is set when the winning status is selected at the same time, 1 is set when the winning status is that the red cherry is winning alone, and 4 is set when the red cherry is simultaneously selected with the black cherry. Will be. Note that the number of symbols at which the “red cherry” symbol can actually be drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 is the number of symbols that is close to the proportion corresponding to the winning situation described in FIG. Well, for example, the number of symbols when the red cherry is winning at the same time as the big bonus (1) is not limited to 11, but may be 10 which is less than 90/100.

  Therefore, for the right reel 2R in the state of FIG. 17, the timing at which the “red cherry” symbol can actually be drawn into the winning line L1 or L3 by operating the stop switch 8R when displayed in the lower row. For example, when the red cherry wins the big bonus (1) and the winning situation, the symbols 0-3, 12-16, 19, 20 and the red cherry are the big bonus (2). At the same time, when the winning situation is winning, the symbols of symbol numbers 1 to 3, 13 to 16, 19, and 20; when red cherry is winning simultaneously with the regular bonus, the symbol numbers 2 to 3, 14 -16, 20 symbols, red cherry is winning alone When the winning situation is symbol number 3 symbol, red cherry is black cherry Becomes a symbol of the symbol number 3,15～16,20 when a winning situation that is winning at the time. Then, as the stop control table for the right reel 2R in the state of FIG. 17, when the stop switch 8R is operated while these symbols are displayed in the lower row, the “red cherry” symbol is used as the winning line L1. Alternatively, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn into L3 is defined is created.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 15C and 15D, the appearance ratio of two or three “red cherry” symbols appearing on one winning line by pressing the “red cherry” symbol, Bonus simultaneous winning percentage when 2 or 3 “Red Cherry” symbols appear on the winning line, and bonus non-winning when 2 or 3 “Red Cherry” symbols appear on the 1 winning line The ratio will be explained. In FIGS. 15C and 15D, the ratio based on the assumption that at least the red cherry is won will be described. Therefore, when the red cherry is won, the ratio of winning simultaneously with each of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, and black cherry is 1 based on each winning probability. / 8, and the ratio of winning alone is 4/8, and is determined based on the ratios described in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). Also, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio indicates the ratio of winning simultaneously with the bonus when two or three “red cherries” symbols appear on one winning line by pressing the “red cherries” symbol. The bonus non-winning ratio indicates a ratio in which the bonus is not simultaneously won when two or three “red cherries” symbols appear on one winning line by pressing the “red cherries” symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the appearance ratio of two “red cherry” symbols appearing on one winning line by pressing the “red cherry” symbol, and the “red cherry” symbols appearing on the one winning line. The bonus simultaneous winning ratio when two appear, and the bonus non-winning ratio when two “red cherry” symbols appear on one winning line are as follows.

Appearance rate of two occurrences: 260/800 ≒ 32.5%
Bonus simultaneous winning ratio when two appear ... 210/260 ≒ 80.7%
Bonus non-winning rate when two appear ... 50/260 ≒ 19.3%
Here, when the left reel 2L described with reference to FIG. 15B is stopped for the first time and the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper stage or the lower stage, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio is compared with “ The bonus simultaneous winning ratio when two “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed is much higher. Thus, for example, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time and the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper stage or the lower stage, when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped, the player is further informed with “red It can be expected that the “cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the same winning line, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (d), the “red cherry” symbol is displayed, and the appearance ratio of three “red cherry” symbols appearing on one winning line is “red cherry” on one winning line. The bonus simultaneous winning ratio when three symbols appear, and the bonus non-winning ratio when three “red cherry” symbols appear on one winning line are as follows.

Appearance rate of 3 appearances 210/800 ≒ 26.5%
Bonus simultaneous winning ratio when three appear ... 210/210 ≒ 100%
Bonus non-winning percentage when 3 appear ... 0/210 ≒ 0%
As described above, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when three “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line is set to be 100%. As a result, for example, when two “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on the same winning line when two reels are stopped, the expectation for the bonus is increased, and “red” is further displayed on the same winning line. It can be expected that the “cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  On the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed as described above, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a prize is generated. It will be a thing. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is shifted as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, a unique effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side. Is transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90.

  Commands transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 include at least a BET command, a winning status notification command, a reel rotation command, a reel stop command, a winning information command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, A stop command, an error command, a setting start command, an initialization command, a power-on command, a BET release command, a credit return command, and a door command are included. The commands transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 include other commands, but since they are not directly related to the present invention, a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used for setting the bet number. Sent when

  The winning status notification command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning information command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of a winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all reels are stopped and a winning determination is made.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the next game (normal game state, RT, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.), and the end of the game Sometimes sent. Since the game state command is a command that is transmitted when the game ends, that is, when the next game can be started (when the betting amount can be set), it indicates that a new game can be started. It can also be said to be a command to be notified.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends. The power-on command is a command indicating that power is turned on. The BET release command is a command indicating that the BET has been released, and is transmitted when the settlement switch 10 is operated and the value of the BET counter becomes 0. The credit return command is a command indicating that the credit has been returned, and is transmitted when the settlement switch 10 is operated and the value of the credit counter becomes zero.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state), and the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON). Sent when

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. Sent. The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  On the other hand, the door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c. The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25.

  The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 performs command transmission processing at a predetermined interval (for example, 2.24 ms), so that the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer Only send one unsent command. On the other hand, the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 obtains a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in an interrupt process (sub) executed at a predetermined interval (eg, 1.12 ms). Thus, in the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU 41a executes command transmission processing at intervals of 2.24 ms, and in one command transmission processing, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer and door command transmission are performed. By transmitting only one of the door commands stored in the trust buffer, even when a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, they are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms. It is possible to reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands on the 91 side.

  When an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or an untransmitted door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is detected in the command transmission process, the delay time is set at random. When the delay time elapses, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or an untransmitted door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted. As a result, the command transmission timing changes randomly, so that the sub-control unit 91 side performs an effect that assists in the pressing based on the command reception timing transmitted from the main control unit 41. Can be prevented.

  When a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation, and in the command transmission processing, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. In addition, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission timing is reached, in principle, the door command transmission is performed rather than the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at predetermined intervals (for example, 100 ms). Then, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 stores in the door command transmission buffer when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the previous monitoring does not match the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the current monitoring. Send the door command that is being. In addition, when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the previous monitoring and the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the current monitoring do not coincide with each other, the CPU 41a performs the external output board 1000 in addition to the transmission of the door command. The output state of the door open signal for is also updated.

  As described later, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the commands sent from the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 in this way.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating command transmission from the CPU 41a is input. In the command reception process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated. In addition, addresses (0 to 127) are assigned to the storage areas for the respective commands.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the CPU 91a receives it at the earliest stage. Based on the command, various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55a to 55i are controlled.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone, so the ROM 91b does not have the reel 2L. Tables indicating all symbols arranged in 2C, 2R are stored in advance, and symbols stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are registered in the stopped symbol table with reference to this table.

  In order to produce an effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning information command, and a winning status notification command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the gaming state applied in the game running on the gaming control board 40 side (The winning situation and the game state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92, a game according to the game state and mode type There is a navigation effect that informs information for specifying the type of the winning combination during the effect and AT.

  A game effect is a bonus medium effect that is executed on the condition that the game state is a big bonus or a regular bonus (a bonus prize effect that is executed when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won, or more than a specified number of medals are paid out) (Including a bonus end effect that is executed when the big bonus ends or when the regular bonus ends), and after the end, the big bonus (1) controlled by RT has ended. Countdown effect for performing the effect of notifying information related to the navigation effect (including presence / absence of AT, number of AT continuation games, etc., hereinafter referred to as navigation related information), effect during RT, navigation effect performed during RT AT performance that is executed when AT is in progress, AT continuation game Specified from a revival effect that performs an effect that informs whether or not it is controlled again by the AT on the condition that the AT has been terminated due to the completion of the AT, and a plurality of modes that change according to the winning situation A mode effect that displays the background, character, and the like on the liquid crystal display 51 in the effect mode is included. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM 142.

  Since the bonus mode effect, countdown effect, RT effect, AT effect, revival effect, and the specific mode effect corresponding to a specific type of mode among a plurality of types are continuously executed across multiple game periods, The actual execution period is a continuous performance that is continuously executed including the period from when all reels stop until the next game where the start switch 7 is operated next is started. The specific type of mode refers to the high accuracy mode and the ceiling mode among a plurality of types of modes. When the mode is shifted to the high accuracy mode and the ceiling mode, a continuous effect is performed in an effect mode corresponding to the mode.

  When the above-described bonus effects, countdown effects, RT effects, AT effects, revival effects, and specific mode effects are being continuously performed, a series of game sounds continue over a plurality of games. Sound is emitted. In this way, game sounds that are continuously output over a plurality of games are referred to as continuous game sound effects. Game sound data for generating game sounds (including continuous game effect sounds) for performing a game effect is stored in a ROM mounted on the audio output circuit 94. The generation of the game sound is generated by the sub control unit 91 outputting a game sound data read command, generation start command, end command, etc. according to the current game state and mode to the voice output circuit 94. Controlled by the circuit 94 and executed.

  In addition, the navigation effect refers to an effect that notifies the type of the winning combination when the AT effect is being executed.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the operation of the player's selection switch 56 and determination switch 57. . In the history display effect, not only the game history is simply displayed as information, but the CPU 91a further performs an operation for advancing the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L, 2C and 2R except for the case where the game is from the start to the stop of the game), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  These effects are controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 51 under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM 142 as effect data. These effect data are prepared for each game state and mode, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 is the game state at that time and It corresponds to the mode. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM 142 in advance.

  However, since the liquid crystal display 51 is also provided over the transmission area on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, depending on the state of the image displayed in the transmission area, the liquid crystal display 51 is drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The visibility of the displayed symbols may be impaired, and the progress of the game may be affected. In view of this, until the rotation of all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R after the start switch 7 is operated, at least the winning determination area to be determined for winning among the transparent areas is not displayed (that is, the transparent area (winning determination area). ), The RGB value of each pixel is set to (31, 31, 31) to be in a completely transmissive state).

  When all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating, the liquid crystal display 51 starts to produce effects, but each pixel in the transmission area (winning determination area) has higher transparency than the image that is originally displayed ( That is, even if the RGB value is controlled to a semi-transparent state (close to (31, 31, 31)) and an image is displayed in a region including the transmissive region (winning determination region), the back surface of the transmissive region (winning determination region) The symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are visible. However, when a small role wins according to the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and medals are paid out accordingly, in order to ensure that the winning combination can be confirmed during the payout of medals. The transparent area (winning determination area) remains hidden, and the image of the transparent area (winning determination area) is controlled to be in a semi-transparent state after the medal payout is completed.

  The image data of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is developed in the frame buffer memory 156 (for writing) in each frame period. The Z buffer method is used so that data remains. In the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to the stop of all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (however, when the medals are paid out until the payout is completed), the forefront of the position corresponding to the transparent area (winning determination area) A transparent area object is set in

  The transparent area object is a completely transparent object having RGB values of (31, 31, 31), and the processing of writing image data to the frame buffer memory 156 is performed with the highest priority in each frame period. ing. When the image data of the transparent area object is written, the Z value written in the Z buffer corresponding to the transparent area (winning determination area) becomes the minimum value indicating the foreground value. Image data of an image or a still image is not written in a portion corresponding to the transmission area (winning determination area).

  In addition, as a method for setting the transmissive area (winning determination area) to the semi-transmissive state, there are two methods of white addition processing and semi-transparent processing, and either of them can be applied. Whether to perform white addition processing or semi-transparency processing depending on the type of effect data and the state of the image that is displayed together with the area other than the original transmission area (winning determination area) Also good. Here, it is assumed that the RGB value in the original image data is (Rs, Gs, Bs), and the RGB value in the image data after undergoing the process of making the translucent state is represented by (Rd, Gd, Bd).

  When the white addition process is performed, the RGB values in the image data of the transmissive area (winning determination area) are calculated as follows.

Rd = Rs + 16 (if Rd> 31 then Rd = 31)
Gd = Gs + 16 (if Gd> 31 then Gd = 31)
Bd = Bs + 16 (if Bd> 31 then Bd = 31)
When translucent processing is performed, the RGB values in the image data of the transmissive area (winning determination area) are calculated as follows (where α is an α value representing translucency).

Rd = 16 * α + Rs * (1−α)
Gd = 16 * α + Gs * (1−α)
Bd = 16 * α + Bs * (1−α)
Among the effects executed by the control of the sub control unit 91, there is a prize effect as an effect by changing the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55a to 55i based on a command output to the LED drive circuit 93.

  The winning effect is an effect of informing the winning combination by blinking the reel LEDs 55a to 55i corresponding to the symbol that establishes the winning symbol (hereinafter referred to as the “constitutive symbol”) when any winning symbol is won in principle. is there. The configuration symbol specifically refers to a symbol other than “ANY” among the symbol combinations described in FIG. 10. For example, the constituent symbol of the big bonus (1) means the red 7 of each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. The grape symbols are the grapes on the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Also, the red cherry configuration symbol refers to the red cherry of the left reel 2L. When the “red cherry” symbol of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line where the red cherry is won, the red cherry component symbol and the “red cherry” of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are displayed. An effect of blinking the reel LED corresponding to the symbol is performed. The “red cherry” symbols of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R that are stopped and displayed on the winning line where the red cherry is won are referred to as a continuous red cherry notification symbol.

  Hereinafter, processing in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed. In order to be able to advance the game, the setting value of the normal range is stored in the setting value work 41c-4 with the main control unit 41 including the CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the CPU 41a of the game control board 40. This activation process is a process performed when a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49 of the game control board 40 and the main control unit 41 is activated. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the main control unit 41 is activated and the main control unit 41 is activated. This process is performed when restarting due to a problem.

  In the startup process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC (except for the disconnection monitoring IC 50), stack pointer, etc. are initialized (step S101), and access to the RAM 41c is permitted (step S102). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON (step S103). If the setting key switch 37 is not ON, the RAM parity is calculated based on all the data stored in the RAM 41c except the parity storage area 41c-7 (step S104).

  Next, the RAM parity calculated here is compared with the RAM parity stored in the parity storage area 41c-7, that is, the RAM parity calculated and stored at the previous power-off (step S105), and both the RAM parities are compared. Whether or not the data stored in the RAM is normal (step S106). In the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the RAM 41c is normal based on the RAM parity is performed only in the startup process.

  If the RAM parities do not match in step S106, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and the process proceeds to the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. If the RAM parities match, the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal, and the register stored in the stack area 41c-6 is restored (step S107). Next, it is determined whether or not any special role is won in the state before the power interruption (step S107a). A power-on command indicating a winning combination is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S107b), and the process proceeds to step S108. It should be noted that transmitting the generated command to the effect control board 90 in FIGS. 18 to 28 indicates a process of storing the generated command in the buffer in order to transmit the generated command to the effect control board 90 by the command transmission process described above. On the other hand, if no special role is won in the state before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is not won is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S107c). The process proceeds to S108. In step S108, the prohibition of interruption is canceled, and the process returns to the process before power-off.

  If the setting key switch 37 is ON in step S103, the prohibition of interruption is canceled (step S110), and the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. 19 (step S111). Then, after the setting change process is completed, the game can be progressed and the process proceeds to the game control process.

  In the activation process, for example, a process for acquiring the disconnection flag storage state from the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and determining whether or not the disconnection flag is stored is performed. If the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not released during a power failure, the disconnection flag is If the disconnection flag is stored, the state of electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 or the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is not stored. Since the electrical connection state between the first and second terminals is released, the process shifts to an abnormal error process, and after the disconnection error code is displayed on the payout display 13, the process shifts to a loop process that does not perform any process. As a result, the progress of the game is disabled.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process executed by the CPU 41a in step S111. In the setting change process, first, a setting change flag indicating that it is in the setting change mode is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (step S201), and the setting value (setting change process) stored in the setting value work 41c-4 is set. Before shifting to (1), the value of the set value work 41c-4 has been rewritten to 1, so it is 1) (step S202).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (steps S203 and S204). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in step S203, 1 is added to the setting value read in step S202 (step S205), and whether or not the setting value after addition is 5, that is, the normal range is set. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded (step S206). If the set value after addition is not 5, the process returns to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps S203 and S204. If the set value after addition is 5, the set value is corrected to 1 (step S207), and the process returns to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps S203 and S204.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in step S204, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work 41c-4 and the set value is confirmed (step S208). Thereafter, the process waits until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the setting key switch 37 has been turned off, the setting change flag set in step S201 is deleted (step S210). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before power interruption is a big bonus or a regular bonus (step S211a). If it is not a big bonus or a regular bonus, the process proceeds to step S211c. On the other hand, if it is a big bonus or a regular bonus, the value of the gaming state flag stored in the special work 41c-3 is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state (step S211b), and the process proceeds to step S211c. In step S211c, the data stored in the RAM 41c (the data in the stack area being used in the stack area 41c-6, the setting value stored in the setting value work 41c-4, and the special work 41c-3 are stored. (Except for the value indicating the gaming state) is initialized (step S211c), and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 18 and proceeds to the game control process. When the setting change process is performed by the processing of steps S211a to S211c, if the gaming state before the setting is a big bonus or a regular bonus, the gaming state is shifted to the initial gaming state, while the setting is changed. When the game state before being performed is an initial game state or RT, the game state is returned.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the RAM abnormality error processing executed by the CPU 41a of the game control board 40. In the RAM abnormality error process, the payout display unit 13 is controlled to display the RAM abnormality error code on the payout display unit 13 (step S301), and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, the data stored in the RAM 41c is compared by comparing the RAM parity calculated at the time of power-off with the RAM parity calculated at the time of startup. It is determined whether or not it is normal, and the routine proceeds to RAM abnormality error processing. In the RAM abnormality error process, since the RAM abnormality error code is displayed on the payout display 13, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled.

  If the RAM parity does not match, the interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, once the RAM abnormality error process is started, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state until the interrupt prohibition is canceled. Even if the power is cut off, the power interruption processing is not performed. In other words, since no new RAM parity is calculated and stored in the power interruption processing, the RAM is always stored except when the setting key switch 37 is activated even when the main control unit 41 is activated. Since the parities do not match, the main control unit 41 cannot be activated to start (resume) the game.

  Once the RAM abnormal error state is entered, the setting key switch 37 is activated and the setting change process is performed until a new setting value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. The game cannot be progressed. In other words, in the state that has shifted to the RAM abnormal error state, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is started on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38 ( Can be resumed). In an error state other than an abnormal RAM error, there is no problem of inconsistency in RAM parity. Therefore, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is released only by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and the game is resumed. Can do.

  As described above, when the game can be progressed, the game processing is repeated one by one in the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And It should be noted that the command transmission from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 will be described only for those necessary for the explanation of the present invention, and the explanation for the command transmission that is not so will be omitted.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a game control process performed by the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 for each game. This process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. Thus, a BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed (step S401). If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage). Details of the BET process will be described later.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process for determining whether or not to perform is performed (step S402). In the lottery process, a winning status notification command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Details of the lottery process will be described later.

  When the lottery process is completed, a reel rotation process is performed (step S403). In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When predetermined conditions (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 333SL, 3SC, 3SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are satisfied, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started and stopped, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively. Details of the reel rotation process will be described later.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-described role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping (step S404). ). If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning information command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. Details of the winning determination process will be described later.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed (step S405). In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. In addition, various processes not related to winning (for example, a process related to the end control of the big bonus and the regular bonus, and the elimination of the winning flag without carryover) are also performed. In the payout process, the big bonus winning flag and the regular bonus winning flag stored in the special work 41c-3 are not erased. As a result, the big bonus winning flag and the regular bonus winning flag are carried over to the next game. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90, and the process proceeds to the BET process so that a new game can be started. Details of the payout process will be described later. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  Next, the BET process in step S401 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step S401. In the BET process, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (step S501). Next, whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not the replay game flag based on the previous game replay winning is set in the RAM 41c (step S502).

  If it is determined that the game is a replay game, the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S503), a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is generated, and transmitted to the effect control board 90. (Step S504). In addition, it determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (step S505). The processes in steps S503 and S504 are repeated until the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number. When the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number, the process waits in a state waiting for detection of the operation of the start switch 7 (step S506). . When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (step S507). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c is 50 (step S508). If the value of the credit counter is 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path set as the payout side (step S509). Then, the process proceeds to step S511. When the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, or when the value of the credit counter is not 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal flow path is set to the hopper tank side so that a medal can be inserted. (Step S510). Then, the process proceeds to step S511.

  If both the value of the credit counter and the value of the BET counter are 0, or if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal (step S514). . If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (step S515). If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S516), a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is generated, and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S516). S517). Then, the process returns to step S507.

  If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 (step S518). If the value of the credit counter is 50, the process returns to step S507 as it is. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the value of the credit counter is incremented by 1 (step S519).

  If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S520). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 7 has been detected (step S521). If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process returns to step S507. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path as the payout side. Further, the operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 are invalidated (step S522). Then, the BET process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S523). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the process returns to step S507. If the value of the credit counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected by the single BET switch 5 (step S524). If the operation of the single BET switch 5 has not been detected, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected by the MAXBET switch 6 (step S525). If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected, the process returns to step S507.

  If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the credit counter value is decremented by 1 (step S526), the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S527), and the current BET counter value is set. A BET command shown is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S528). Then, the process returns to step S507.

  If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S529). If the credit counter value is not 0, the credit counter value is decremented by 1 (step S530), the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S531), and a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is issued. It produces | generates and transmits to the production | presentation control board 90 (step S532). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter has reached a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S533). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the process returns to step S507. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to step S529. If it is determined in step S529 that the value of the credit counter is 0, the process returns to step S507.

  Next, the payment process in step S513 will be described in detail. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the checkout process executed by the CPU 41a in step S513. In the settlement process, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path set as the payout side (step S601). Further, the hopper motor 34b is driven to be turned on (step S602).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BET number is to be settled (step S603). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. When it is not 0, it is determined that the BET number is to be settled, and when it is 0, it is determined that the BET number is not to be settled.

  When it is determined that the BET number is to be settled, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (step S609), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (step S610). When it is determined in step S610 that the value of the BET counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S609, and when it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S611. When it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0, a BET cancellation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the BET number is not settled, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S604). When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated without paying out medals. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (step S606), and it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter has become 0 (step S607). When it is determined in step S607 that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S606, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S611. When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, a credit return command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In step S611, the hopper motor 34b is turned off to stop driving. Then, the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  Next, the lottery process in step S402 described above will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step S402. In the lottery process, the number of bets (the number of bets) set in the current game is read (step S701). Next, it is determined whether or not the read number of bets is a prescribed number (for example, 3 during the initial gaming state and RT, 1 during the big bonus and regular bonus) (step S702). When the read number of bets is not the prescribed number, a RAM abnormality error occurs and the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. 20 is performed. When the read number of bets is the specified number, the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, the setting value stored in the setting value work 41c-4 of the RAM 41c is read. Here, it is determined whether or not the read setting value is in the range of 1 to 4 that is a value that should be originally taken (step S704). If the read set value is not in the range of 1 to 4, a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. 20 is performed.

  If the read set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the lottery target combination corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially read out of the lottery target combinations registered in the winning combination table described above (step S705). Next, the setting state of the common flag registered in the role-specific table for the read lottery target is referred (step S706), and it is determined whether or not the common flag is in an ON state (step S707).

  If the common flag is ON, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the gaming state is acquired for the read lottery target character (step S708). Then, the process proceeds to step S710. If the common flag is not in the ON state, the setting value set in the RAM 41c is read, and the determination value stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the gaming state and the setting value for the lottery target role The number is acquired (step S709). Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the random number for internal lottery stored in the determination area of the RAM 41c (the random number extracted from the random number generating circuit 42, the random number extracted from the random number generating circuit 42 is converted into software by using the number of determination values acquired in step S708 or S709. (Including random numbers processed in a predetermined procedure, random numbers added in step S710, etc.), and the result of the addition is used as a new random number for internal lottery. Then, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (step S711).

  If no overflow has occurred, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations to be selected (step S712). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to step S705, and the process continues with the next lottery target registered in the winning combination table as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the process proceeds to step S721.

  If an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, the winning flag of the lottery object combination read in step S705 is set to ON. Specifically, a predetermined winning flag is set to ON according to the number and type of winning combinations.

  When the value of the RT counter indicating that it is controlled by RT is set to 1 or more and the gaming state is controlled by RT, when the winning lottery winning team wins a big bonus or regular bonus However, the control to RT is continued without performing the process of terminating RT. Note that it may be configured such that processing for terminating RT is performed by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus. Even in this case, with the winning of the big bonus or regular bonus, the degree of advantage (for example, replay winning probability) varies depending on the type of bonus won until winning the selected bonus. It is also possible to perform a process of controlling the above. The values of various flags and various counters are stored and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  In step S721, a winning status notification command is generated according to the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the reel rotation process in step S403 will be described in detail. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step S403. In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (for example, about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (step S801), and if the wait time has not elapsed, Wait until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, a new wait time is set and the timing is newly started (step S802a). The wait time is measured by subtracting and updating values stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at predetermined intervals.

  Next, a work initialization code at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is set in the register, and the rotation of the reel is started (step S803). Here, a reel rotation command indicating that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have started to rotate is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S804). Then, with reference to the table index, the table creation data is identified, and based on the identified table creation data, a stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the internal winning situation, and the other reels stop situation is created. Then, it is created for each reel being rotated (step S805), and a work initialization code at the time of completion of stop preparation is set in the register (step S806a). Thereby, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any valid operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R has been detected (step S807). If no stop switch operation is detected, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 for a certain period or longer) has occurred (step S808). ). If no reel rotation error has occurred, the process returns to step S807.

  If it is determined in step S808 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating the reel rotation error is set in the register (step S809), and the process proceeds to a predetermined error process (step S810b). Along with this, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is also temporarily stopped. If the error is released, the process returns to step S803 again, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is resumed.

  If operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected in step S807, the reel motor (any one of 32L, 32C, 32R) corresponding to the operated stop switch from the reel reference position at that time. The number of steps (stop operation position) is acquired, the number of frames to be drawn is specified with reference to the stop control table of the corresponding reel, and the stop position is set to the work corresponding to the stop reel (step S811). Here, a reel stop command indicating the type of reel to be stopped and the symbols to be stopped for the reel is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S812). After that, it waits until the rotation of the reel (2L, 2C, or 2R) corresponding to the operated stop switch stops (step S813).

  Then, when the rotation of the reel (2L, 2C, 2R) corresponding to the operated stop switch stops, it is determined whether or not all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (step S814). If the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not stopped, the process returns to step S805. If the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the winning determination process in step S404 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step S404. In the winning determination process, the winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is read in order from the beginning (step S901). Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the read combination is aligned with any of the five winning lines L1 to L5 (step S902).

  If the symbol combination of the combination is complete, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (step S903), and the process proceeds to step S904. As described above, the red cherry may win a plurality of winning lines. Therefore, in step S903, when winning a plurality of winning lines, a winning flag corresponding to the number of winning lines and the type of the combination is set in the RAM 41c. For example, if red cherries are won on two winning lines, a winning flag for red cherries 2 lines is set, and if red cherries are won on one winning line, red cherries are used for winning one line. Set a winning flag.

  If the symbol combination of the combination is not complete, the process proceeds to step S904 as it is. In step S904, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been determined as a winning determination among the combinations corresponding to the gaming state. If there is a winning combination that has not yet been determined for winning, the process returns to step S901, and the next winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is read out.

  If all of the winning combinations corresponding to the gaming state are targeted for winning determination, it is next determined whether or not a replay winning is made based on whether or not a replay winning flag is set in the RAM 41c (step S905).

  If no replay prize has been won, it is determined whether or not a bonus prize has been won depending on whether or not a bonus flag (any of big bonuses (1), (2), regular bonus) is set in the RAM 41c (step S906). . If the bonus has been won, the bonus bonus flag corresponding to the bonus won in the RAM 41c (for example, the big bonus bonus flag for the big bonus (1)) is set to the ON state and the corresponding bonus winning is performed. Set the flag to the OFF state. In the case of a big bonus winning or a regular bonus winning, the value of a bonus counter (B counter) indicating the remaining payout number (B counter 406 for big bonus (1), 271 for big bonus (2), regular In the case of a bonus, 120) is set (step S907). Further, when RT is in progress, processing for resetting the value of the RT counter and terminating RT is performed. In step S907, an effect waiting time at the time of bonus winning for controlling the frozen state after the big bonus winning or the regular bonus winning is further set. Then, the process proceeds to step S913. Note that during the period when the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the big bonus is controlled. Further, during the period when the regular bonus flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus is controlled. If it is determined in step S906 that no bonus has been won, the process proceeds to step S913.

  If the replay is won in step S905, the replay game is set by setting the replay game flag in the RAM 41c to the ON state in step S912. This replay game in-progress flag is deleted when the bet amount is automatically set in the next game. Then, the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S913, the type of winning combination based on the winning flag set in the ON state in the RAM 41c (the winning flag is not set in the case of deviation) and the number of medals to be paid out with the winning are displayed. A winning information command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the payout process in step S405 described above will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the payout process executed by the CPU 41a in step S405. In the payout process, first, a winning flag set to ON in the RAM 41c is read (step S1001), and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the winning flag read in step S1001 is one of the small bonus winning flags of grape, banana, red cherry, and black cherry. It is determined whether or not there is a small prize winning (step S1002). If the small role is not won, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  If a small role is won, by controlling the hopper 80, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of winning lines and the type of the winning combination (step S1003), and the number of payouts is counted (step S1003). S1004). The number of payouts counted in step S1004 is stored in the RAM 41c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  Here, it is determined in step S1002 that a small role has not been won, or it is determined in step S1004 that one game has been completed by counting the number of payouts. In other words, if the small role is won, it is determined that the game is over when the payout of the medals is completed and the number of payouts is counted, but if the small role is not won, the medals are not paid out. This is the same as determining that the game is over when all reels have stopped rotating. As will be described later, if it is determined in step S1002 that a small role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1005 as it is, and if a small role has been won, medals are paid out in steps S1003 and S1004. In step 1023, the game state command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. By receiving the gaming state command, the sub-control unit 91 determines that one game has been completed and the state has shifted to a game preparation state in which a bet amount for starting a new game can be set.

  In step S1005, the value of the RT counter is set to 1 or more, and it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled to RT. When it is determined that the value of the RT counter is 1 or more, the RT counter value is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1009. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the RT counter is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S1009 as it is.

  In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (except for the game that won the big bonus or the regular bonus here) depending on whether or not the bonus-in-progress flag is set to the ON state in the RAM 41c. . If the current gaming state is not in bonus, the process proceeds to step S1023.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1009 that the current gaming state is bonus, the value obtained by subtracting the number of payouts counted in step S1004 from the bonus counter value in the RAM 41c is updated as the bonus counter value. The counter value of the number is cleared and initialized (step S1012), and the process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1012, the number of games and winnings in the bonus are counted using the counter of the RAM 41c.

  In step S1013, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus counter is 0 or less. That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of medals has been paid out corresponding to the type of big bonus or regular bonus. When it is determined that the value of the bonus counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1023. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bonus counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the completed bonus is a big bonus (1) controlled to RT after the end (step S1014). If it is determined that the big bonus (1) has not ended, the process proceeds to step S1016. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big bonus (1) has ended, the prescribed number of games (100) is set to the value of the RT counter and processing for controlling to RT is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1016. Then, the big bonus medium flag or regular bonus medium flag corresponding to the completed bonus is set to the OFF state, and the value of the counter for counting the number of games and winnings in the big bonus or regular bonus is cleared and initialized ( Step S1016) and the process proceeds to Step S1023. In step S1016, when the specified number of medals are paid out and the big bonus or the regular bonus is ended, an ending effect waiting time for controlling to the frozen state is set.

  In step S1023, based on the bonus flag in the RAM 41c and the RT counter, a gaming state command indicating a gaming state applied in the next game is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S1023). Then, the payout process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 21 to end the process of one game.

  Note that when the above-described freeze state is controlled, for example, a process for controlling the freeze state (for example, a process for shifting to step S1023 after measuring a predetermined time) is performed before the process proceeds to step S1023. The process of controlling the freeze state delays the transition to the game preparation state. In the process of controlling the freeze state, a delay command indicating that the transition to the game preparation state is delayed is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 when the process is started. The sub-control unit 91 determines that the transition to the game preparation state is delayed on the condition that the delay command has been received before receiving the gaming state command, and the winning effect is received from the time when the delay command is received. Is started.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among the initial game state, the RT, the big bonus, and the regular bonus, and produces a command according to the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the control board 90. On the other hand, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In the effect control board 90, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board 100, the sub-control unit 91 is activated. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91. When the effect control main process is started, first, a predetermined effect initial setting process is executed (Ss1). Details of the effect initial setting process will be described later.

  When the effect initial setting process is completed, an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 such as the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state when the power supply is stopped is executed (Ss2). Details of the effect control restoration process will also be described later.

  After executing the effect control restoration process, after interrupting is prohibited (Ss3), the effect side random value update process is executed (Ss4), and the interruption is permitted (Ss5). . The effect random number value update process executed in Ss4 is a process for updating all or part of the random value used on the effect control board 90 side by software.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect initial setting process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss1 of FIG. In the effect initial setting process, first, interruption is prohibited (Ss101), and an interrupt mode is set (Ss102).

  Next, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of the designated address of the stack pointer, are performed (Ss103). Also, the built-in device register is set (initialized) in the sub-control unit 91 (Ss104). Then, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in peripheral circuits in the sub-control unit 91, are set (initialized) (Ss105). Thereafter, the RAM 91c is set to be accessible (Ss106).

  Thereafter, the VDP 141 is initialized, for example, after transmitting a predetermined initialization signal to the VDP 141 and then transmitting initial setting data for setting in the internal register of the VDP 141 (Ss107). Thereby, in the VDP 141, for example, the storage contents of the temporary storage memory 155 and the frame buffer memory 156 are initialized based on the initialization signal and the initialization data received from the sub-control unit 91, the transfer control circuit 152, the drawing circuit, and the like. 154 or the moving picture decoder 158 or the like is interrupted, or the storage area in the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is assigned to set the display area. When the display image update cycle in the liquid crystal display 51 is set, at least one of various setting operations performed is executed.

  Next, for example, setting for generating a random number used on the side of the effect control board 90 is performed such as setting the operation of the random number circuit 134 based on the random number initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss108). Further, for example, an interrupt is set by setting a reset / interrupt controller or a CTC register based on the interrupt initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss109). Thereby, in the sub-control unit 91, a timer interrupt for controlling the rendering operation is generated every predetermined time. Then, the effect initial setting process ends.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect control restoration process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss2 of FIG. First, a data check of the RAM 91c is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (Ss201). In this process, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the calculated checksum and an effect checksum buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 91c are stored. Compare with checksum. The effect checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. This effect checksum buffer is included in the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the contents of the effect checksum buffer are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. If the comparison result between the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the effect checksum buffer does not match, it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result of the data in the RAM 91c is normal, it is determined whether or not the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is ON (Ss202). The state of the effect backup flag is set in the effect control flag setting unit when the power supply is stopped. And the setting location of this production backup flag is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped.

  When the production backup flag is ON, the production backup flag is cleared to the OFF state (Ss203), and then the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped. Setting is made (Ss204). For example, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 91b is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 91c. Here, when the work area of the RAM 91c is backed up by a backup power source, it is only necessary to set initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area in the backup setting table. Subsequently, the production backup data for restoring the control state is read from the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the settings of the internal register of the CPU 91a and the work area of the RAM 91c are sub-controlled according to the read data. The state before the unit 91 is restarted is restored.

  Thereafter, based on the setting in step Ss204, for example, a display control command corresponding to the restored state is transmitted to the VDP 141, and various settings in the VDP 141 are resumed (Ss205). Note that after executing the process of Ss205, for example, the process may return to the process corresponding to the contrast value set in the program counter by the return of the control state in Ss204.

  If the data check result of the RAM 91c is abnormal in Ss201, or if the effect backup flag is OFF in Ss202, the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss206). Subsequent to the initialization of the RAM 91c, the initial setting for setting the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the initial state is performed (Ss207).

  In the effect control restoration process, when a power-on command is received from the main control unit 41, if the power-on command indicates that the special role is won, a notice effect indicating that the special role is won is executed by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Then, while the control is continued until the special combination is won, if it is a power-on command indicating that the special combination is not won, the effect control restoration process is terminated.

  Also, in the production control recovery process, until the power-on command or initialization command is received, even if the production backup is normal, it does not return to the production state, and even if other commands are received, The production is not controlled. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special announcement and the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won.

  That is, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is transmitted. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating the winning, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating the winning of the special role, and avoids receiving the power-on command on the side of the sub-control unit 91 to notify the winning of the special role. Since it is impossible to avoid the execution of the production, when the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption and the special role is elected before the power interruption as described above, The winning of special role will be notified.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt for controlling the progress of the production at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) according to the setting of the interrupt in Ss109, and the timer / allocation of the RAM 91c is performed by the reset / interrupt controller. Is set to the ON state. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect control interrupt process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in response to the timer interrupt flag being set to the ON state.

  In the effect control interrupt process, first, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (Ss301), and the contents of the internal register are saved (Ss302). Next, an effect backup process, which will be described later in detail, is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, data necessary for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up (Ss303). Then, the reset circuit 95 is cleared by setting control data for turning on the initialization signal in a predetermined output port included in the I / O port 91d (Ss304).

  Next, a command analysis process for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 and stored in the reception buffer is executed (Ss305), and an effect control process described in detail later is executed (Ss306). By this effect control process, various effects are performed by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating a game sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Next, a volume adjustment process to be described later is executed (Ss306a). In the present embodiment, a volume switch (not shown) for setting the volume level is mounted on any one of a plurality of volume levels (large, medium, small, off). In the volume adjustment process, a process for generating game sounds corresponding to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 from the speakers 53 and 54 at the volume level set by the volume switch according to the program stored in the ROM 91b. Done. Next, effect random number value update processing is performed, and various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the effect control board 90 side (Ss307). Thereafter, the contents of the register saved in Ss302 are restored (Ss308), and the effect control interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect backup process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss303 of FIG. In the effect backup process, data for effect backup is set using stored data in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss401). Here, for example, depending on the values of various flags provided in the effect flag setting unit of the RAM 91c and the values of various timers provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 91c, the control state in the sub control unit 91 and the display control circuit 92 If the progress of various processes can be specified, the production backup data may be configured by data indicating the values of these flags and timers. Further, if the control state of the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 can be specified from the stored value of the internal register (for example, program counter) of the CPU 91a, for example, the stored value of such internal register The production backup data may be configured with the data indicating. Alternatively, the effect backup data may be configured by combining data indicating the value of the flag or timer and data indicating the stored value of the built-in register. In addition, even if any data that can be recovered after restarting by specifying the control state in the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 is included in the production backup data Good.

  Next, check data is created, for example, by calculating a checksum using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss402). And the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting part of RAM91c is set to ON state (Ss403), and effect backup processing is complete | finished. When a part of the RAM 91c is backed up by the backup power source, the production backup data created in Ss401, the check data created in Ss402, the data indicating the production backup flag set in the ON state in Ss403, etc. Then, it may be stored in the backup area of the RAM 91c at the end of the effect backup process.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process and the volume adjustment process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in Ss306 and Ss306a of FIG.

  FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the effect control process. In the effect control process, the CPU 91a performs a demonstration effect execution process for executing a demonstration effect (step Ss501) and performs other processes (step Ss507) when the demonstration period is described later. The demo period is a period excluding a continuous effect such as an effect during a bonus, for example, and refers to a period from when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the game ends until a BET command is newly received. Thereby, for example, in the demonstration period, a predetermined demonstration effect is executed until a new BET command is received.

  When starting the demonstration effect, the CPU 91a outputs a demonstration effect start signal for instructing the demonstration effect start to the display control circuit 92. When the display control circuit 92 receives the demonstration effect start signal, the display control circuit 92 reads effect data for performing the demonstration effect from the CGROM 142, stores it in the temporary storage memory 155, and the image data drawn in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154 The display circuit 157 starts a predetermined demonstration effect on the liquid crystal display 51.

  On the other hand, in the effect control process, when a predetermined mode change condition for changing the type of mode is established in a period other than the demonstration period, a mode transition process for shifting to a mode corresponding to the mode change condition is performed. (Step Ss502). Further, the navigation related information determination process for determining the above-described navigation related information (including the presence / absence of AT, the number of AT continuing games, etc.) is performed on the condition that it is controlled by RT (step S503).

  After performing the navigation related information determination process, a game effect execution process for executing a game effect (including a continuous effect) according to the type of game state and mode is performed (step Ss504). Further, a navigation execution process is executed to execute a navigation effect for notifying information for specifying the type of the winning combination in the internal lottery during the AT (step Ss505). In addition, a winning effect execution process for executing a winning effect for blinking the reel LED corresponding to the winning design symbol and the continuous red cherry notification symbol is performed (step Ss506), and other processing is performed (step Ss507).

  When starting a game effect, the CPU 91a outputs a game effect start signal for instructing a corresponding game effect start to the display control circuit 92. When receiving the game effect start signal, the display control circuit 92 reads effect data for performing the corresponding game effect from the CGROM 142, stores it in the temporary storage memory 155, and the image drawn in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154. The game effect corresponding to the liquid crystal display 51 is started by the display circuit 157. When the effect data for performing the continuous effect is stored in the temporary storage memory 155, the game is not performed for a predetermined time without betting, for example, until the continuous effect ends. However, the display control circuit 92 prohibits writing to the temporary storage memory 155 and performs other effects such as a demonstration effect so that the effect data for performing the demonstration effect is not stored in the temporary storage memory 155. Absent.

  Further, in other processing, for example, processing for generating game sounds corresponding to the game effects from the speakers 53 and 54 is performed. When performing an effect of generating game sound from the speakers 53 and 54, the CPU 91a outputs a command signal for generating a game sound corresponding to the game effect to the audio output circuit 94.

  In other processes, for example, a predetermined game history is displayed on a liquid crystal display based on the player's operation of the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 during a period when the game is not being performed except during the continuous production. A history display effect execution process for executing a history display effect to be displayed on the display 51 is performed. During the continuous production, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is invalidated so that the history display production is not executed.

  In other processing, for example, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the front door is in an open state based on reception of a door command (for example, an open state when indicating ON (open state)). It is necessary to receive a command indicating the detection state after the change for a predetermined period (when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes). When the detection state becomes a definite detection state without receiving a new door command even after a sufficient period of time (for example, 200 ms or more) elapses, a door opening notification indicating that the front door is open is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 is blinked, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error notification sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. After that, when a door command is received and it is determined that the door is in the closed state, a predetermined period (when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, a command indicating the detection state after the change is received) When the detection state becomes a definite detection state without receiving a new door command even after a sufficient period of time (for example, 200 ms or more) elapses, the door opening notification is stopped and the original effect is restored.

  If a new door command is received from the last door command received until the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the detection status indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection status, and a new door command is received. If no door command is received after a predetermined period of time later, the detection state indicated by the last received door command is set to the definite detection state, and if the definite detection state is ON (door open), the door is opened. If the confirmation detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the front door is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the front door is open based on the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the CPU 41a. The door opening notification is performed based on the determination result.

  Next, the contents of the mode transition process and the navigation related information determination process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram for describing a plurality of types of modes and the number of AT continuing games. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart for explaining an example of timing at which navigation related information is determined.

  Referring to FIG. 35, a low-accuracy mode, a high-accuracy mode, a replay triple mode, and a ceiling mode are provided as modes for specifying the production mode. In the mode transition process of step Ss502 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 34A, the mode is shifted to the type corresponding to the established mode change condition.

  The mode change condition to the low-accuracy mode is any role when a series of ATs (for example, ATs that are continuously controlled with a countdown effect) end, or during the high-accuracy mode or the replay triple mode. It is established when a winner is won in a predetermined falling lottery performed when a prize is lost without winning.

  The mode change condition to the high-accuracy mode is satisfied when a winning is made in a predetermined promotion lottery performed when a banana is won in the internal lottery in the low-accuracy mode.

  The mode change condition for the replay triple mode is satisfied when the player has won three consecutive replays in the low game mode or high game mode during the initial game state.

  The mode change condition to the ceiling mode is one of the low accuracy mode, the high accuracy mode, and the replay triple mode, and the big bonus or regular bonus after the last big bonus or regular bonus ends. It is established when a predetermined game (for example, 1000 games) is consumed without winning.

  The navigation related information described above is conditional on being controlled by RT or digesting the number of AT continuous games and ending AT in the navigation related information determining process of step Ss503 in the effect control process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, it is determined at a predetermined timing according to the distribution of the number of AT continuing games shown in FIG.

  When the number of AT continuation games is determined to be “0”, it is not controlled by the AT, and no navigation effect is performed even when the winning combination is won. Further, when either “50” or “95” is determined as the number of AT continuing games, the navigation is controlled by the AT until the determined number of games is exhausted or the big bonus or regular bonus is won. Production is performed.

  When the mode is shifted to the low accuracy mode, “0 times” is determined with a probability of 90% and “50 times” is determined with a probability of 10% as navigation related information. When the mode is shifted to the high accuracy mode, “0 times” is determined with a probability of 70%, “50 times” with a probability of 20%, and “95 times” with a probability of 10% as navigation-related information. . When the mode is changed to the replay triple mode, the navigation-related information is determined as “0 times” with a probability of 30%, “50 times” with a probability of 20%, and “95 times” with a probability of 50%. The When the mode is shifted to the ceiling mode, “0 times” is determined with a probability of 40%, “50 times” with a probability of 30%, and “95 times” with a probability of 30% as navigation related information. In this way, according to the type of mode being transferred, the probability of being controlled by the AT and the number of AT continuing games are distributed differently. As a result, the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the type of mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, an example of the timing at which the mode is changed and an example of the timing at which the navigation related information is determined will be described. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time. From the top of the vertical axis, the (a) column indicates the winning status of bonuses and red cherries, and the (b) column indicates the gaming state (including AT). In the (c) column, a game effect is shown, and in the (d) column, navigation related information determination timing is shown. In the (c) column, a timing chart showing a continuous effect among the game effects is shown. Note that the circled numbers shown in the lower column of FIG. 36 indicate the timing in each of (a) to (d), and are simply indicated as timing 1 to timing 7 in the following. Also, immediately before the timing 1 in FIG. 36, it is assumed that the game state is controlled in the initial game state, the mode is shifted to the low-accuracy mode, and the game effect is performed in the mode of the low-accuracy mode.

  Timing 1 shows the timing when Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry is read as a lottery target and won in the internal lottery. At timing 1, as shown in the (a) column, the big bonus (1) winning flag and red cherry winning flag are set to the ON state.

  Timing 2 indicates the timing at which the game started at timing 1 ends. In the game, it is assumed that the operation for the left reel 2L is performed at an appropriate timing for winning the red cherry described in FIGS. 13 and 14, and the red cherry is won. Thus, the player can have a sense of expectation for the simultaneous bonus winning by winning the red cherry. Further, in the game, the display result is further stopped and displayed on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R according to the ratio described in FIG. 16 and FIG. Here, since the red cherry is simultaneously won with the big bonus (1), the center reel 2C and the right reel 2R each have a ratio of about 90/100 when the red cherry is pressed for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. The “red cherry” symbol is drawn on the 1 winning line and stopped. As a result, a sense of expectation for the bonus simultaneous winning is obtained according to the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, that is, according to the number of “red cherry” symbols stopped and displayed on one winning line. Can be increased.

  Timing 3 shows the timing when winning the big bonus (1) won at timing 1. At timing 3, the big bonus (1) winning flag is set to the OFF state as shown in the (a) column, the big bonus (1) is controlled as shown in the (b) column, and (c) As shown in the column, a bonus medium effect corresponding to the big bonus (1) is started.

  Timing 4 shows the timing when 406 or more medals are paid out after winning the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (1) ends. At timings 3 to 4, an effect for notifying that a bonus is in effect (for example, an effect in which a character acquires a predetermined “medal” item) is performed as an effect during bonus.

  At timing 4, the big bonus (1) ends and is controlled to RT as shown in the column (b). Also, at timing 4, after the bonus medium effect is ended as shown in the (c) column, the mode when the big bonus (1) shown at the timing 1 is won as shown in the (d) column. The navigation related information is determined according to the low probability mode distribution rate. Here, it is assumed that “50 times” is determined as the number of AT continuing games in the navigation related information determination process. Furthermore, the countdown effect described above is started based on the determined navigation related information.

  Timing 5 indicates the timing at which the game is completed five times from timing 4. From the timing 4 until the game is played five times, as a countdown effect, an effect as to whether or not it is controlled by the AT (for example, an effect as to whether or not the character acquires the item “AT”) is performed. . At the timing 5, as shown in the column (c), the character obtains an effect (for example, “AT” item for informing that the AT is controllable for the number of AT continuing games determined at the timing 4). , An effect that displays a message such as “AT has entered 50 times!” Is performed, and then an effect during AT is started. Further, at timing 5, as shown in the column (b), it is controlled to RT and controlled to AT. While being controlled by the AT, a navigation effect that informs information for specifying the type of the winning combination is performed.

  In the navigation-related information determination process at timing 4, when “0” is determined as the number of AT continuing games, an effect that informs that AT is not controlled at timing 5 (for example, the item “AT” is displayed by the character). Cannot be acquired, an effect of displaying a message such as “Not entering AT! Sorry!” Is performed.

  As long as the navigation effect is to notify information for identifying the type of the winning combination, for example, the type of winning combination may be informed so that the type of the winning combination can be specified. May be notified of a stop operation timing (timing to operate a stop switch) for winning a prize.

  In order to notify the type of a winning combination in an identifiable manner, for example, a lamp provided corresponding to the winning combination is turned on, or a predetermined combination is determined for the winning combination. Or a character that changes the color of the background screen to a color corresponding to the winning combination. Specifically, when displaying a character corresponding to a winning combination as a navigation effect, for example, when a banana is won, an effect that makes a banana character appear, red cherry is won. In this case, an effect may be performed in which a common red cherry character appears regardless of whether a bonus or black cherry is won simultaneously. Characters that appear in advance are also associated with other roles, and an effect of causing a character to appear according to the type of the winning combination is performed.

  Thus, since the navigation effect is executed when controlled by the AT, the player can specify the type of the winning combination and perform a stop operation. For this reason, it is possible to reduce missed combinations.

  Timing 6 shows the timing when the number of AT continuing games is consumed. At timing 6, the AT ends as shown in the (b) column and is controlled only for the RT, and the during-AT effect is ended and the revival effect is started as shown in the (c) column. . Also, at timing 6, as with the navigation-related information determination process shown at timing 4, whether or not to control again to the AT according to the low probability mode allocation rate when the big bonus (1) is won at timing 1 Or navigation-related information is determined. Here, it is assumed that “50 times” is determined as the number of AT continuing games in the navigation related information determination process. Then, based on the determined navigation related information, the revival effect described above is started.

  Timing 7 indicates a timing at which the game is finished three times from timing 6. At timings 6 to 7, an effect as to whether or not to be controlled again by the AT is performed as a revival effect. At the timing 7, as shown in the column (c), the character acquires an effect (for example, an item “AT”) informing that the AT can be controlled by the number of AT continuing games determined at the timing 6. Then, the effect during the AT is started after the effect “displaying a message such as“ Entering AT 50 times again! ”Is performed).

  Next, the contents of the winning effect execution process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining a winning effect performed by changing the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55a to 55i.

  The sub-control unit 91 causes the reel LED corresponding to the winning symbol of the winning combination among the reel LEDs 55a to 55i and the continuous red cherry notification symbol to blink when any winning combination is won in the winning effect execution process. A process of outputting a command to the LED drive circuit 93 is performed to control the winning effect. The sub-control unit 91 may identify the constituent symbol and the continuous red cherry notification symbol by determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command, and also include a winning line that includes information on the winning line that has been won. When the information command is transmitted from the main control unit 41, the information command may be specified based on the winning information command.

  FIG. 37 (a) shows a case where the red cherry is won in the winning lines L1 and L3, and the “red cherry” symbols of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not stopped and displayed on any of the winning lines L1 and L3. It shows the winning effect at the time. The configuration pattern of the red cherry is the “red cherry” design of the left reel 2L. For this reason, when the red cherry is won in the winning lines L1 and L3, the sub-control unit 91 performs control to blink the reel LEDs 55a corresponding to the constituent symbols of the red cherry.

  FIG. 37 (b) shows the winning effect when the red cherry is won in the winning lines L1 and L3 and the “red cherry” symbol of the middle reel 2C is stopped and displayed on the winning line L3. The configuration pattern of the red cherry is the red cherry of the right reel 2R, and the continuous red cherry notification pattern is the red cherry of the middle reel 2C. For this reason, when the red cherry is won in the winning lines L1 and L3 and the continuous red cherry notification symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C, the sub-control unit 91, the reel LED 55a corresponding to the red cherry component symbol, And the control which blinks reel LED55e corresponding to a continuous red cherry alerting | reporting symbol is performed.

  When the “Red Cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L is not stopped and displayed on the winning line and the Red Cherry symbol is not awarded, the “Red Cherry” symbol of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R stops on the one winning line. When displayed, control may be performed to blink the reel LED corresponding to the “red cherry” symbol. Accordingly, it is possible to easily notify that a plurality of “red cherries” symbols have been stopped and displayed on one winning line.

  In addition, although the example which blinks the reel LED corresponding to a structure symbol and a continuous red cherry alert symbol as a winning effect was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this, The reel LED corresponding to a component symbol and a continuous red cherry alert symbol is lighted. It may be. The aspect of the winning effect may be an aspect in which the player can recognize the constituent symbol, the continuous red cherry notification symbol, and the other symbols. For example, the reel LED corresponding to the constituent symbol and the continuous red cherry notification symbol is the first. The lighting control may be performed in the above manner, and the reel LEDs corresponding to the symbols other than the configuration symbol and the continuous red cherry notification symbol may be controlled in a second manner different from the first manner. In addition, the aspect of the winning effect may be such that the reel LEDs corresponding to the configuration symbol and the continuous red cherry notification symbol are controlled to be lighted in different manners according to the number of winning lines that have been won. As a result, it is possible to easily notify the winning and the number of winning lines.

  Moreover, although the example of performing lighting control in the same manner as the configuration symbol for the reel LED corresponding to the continuous red cherry notification symbol has been described as the aspect of the winning effect, not limited to this, the reel LED corresponding to the continuous red cherry notification symbol Lighting control may be performed in a manner different from the configuration pattern. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the continuous red cherry notification symbols separately from the constituent symbols.

  Moreover, although the example which light-controls the reel LED corresponding to a structure symbol was demonstrated as a winning effect, if it is the aspect which can alert | report the winning combination, what kind of thing may be sufficient as this. For example, when the constituent symbol is a different symbol combination such as “melon-grape-melon”, for example, when this constituent symbol is stopped on the winning line, grapes are placed on the reels 2C in the other winning lines. When the same symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L and / or the right reel 2R, only the reel LEDs provided corresponding to the symbols of grapes stopped on the other winning lines among the reel LEDs 55a to 55i are controlled to be lit. You may do. Thereby, since it can confirm that the symbol of grape is prepared for the player, the kind of winning combination (for example, it is grape) can be easily recognized.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the timing at which a winning effect is performed by the winning effect execution process.

  The winning effect is started on the condition that the sub control unit 91 has received a gaming state command from the main control unit 41. This is because it is determined that the main control unit 41 has shifted to a game preparation state in which the number of bets for starting a new game can be set by the sub control unit 91 receiving a gaming state command. is there. For example, the sub-control unit 91 may start the winning effect when a gaming state command is received from the main control unit 41, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the gaming state command. It may be.

  For example, when the bet number can be set in the game control process described with reference to FIG. 21 (for example, before the process of step S401 is executed), a command indicating that the bet number can be set. The slot machine transmitted from the main control unit 41 may be configured to start the winning effect on the condition that the command is received.

  The winning effect that starts when the gaming state command is received ends when the sub control unit 91 receives any of the BET command, the BET release command, and the credit return command from the main control unit 41. The reason why the winning effect is ended when the BET command is received is that it is determined that the player has performed an operation for starting the next game. In addition, when the BET cancellation command or the credit return command is received, the winning effect is terminated because it is highly likely that a game such as a bet settlement (BET cancellation) or a credit settlement is likely to be interrupted. It is to be done.

  The winning effect is also started on the condition that the sub control unit 91 has received a delay command from the main control unit 41. This is because the main control unit 41 determines that the transition to the game preparation state has been delayed due to the sub-control unit 91 receiving the delay command. For example, the sub-control unit 91 may start the winning effect when a delay command is received from the main control unit 41, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the delay command. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 34, FIG. 34 (b) is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment processing. As described above, the volume of the game sound can be set from a plurality of volume levels (high, medium, small, off) by operating a volume switch (not shown). In the volume adjustment process, a process for generating game sounds corresponding to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 from the speakers 53 and 54 at the volume level set by the volume switch according to the program stored in the ROM 91b. Done. For this reason, even when the same game sound is generated from the speakers 53 and 54, the volume varies depending on the volume level set by the volume switch. In the volume adjustment process, when the game sound is played at the normal volume (here, the volume at the set volume level), the volume of the game sound that is currently being played is set to the minimum (with the specified mute condition established) A mute process (step Ss601) is performed. The predetermined mute condition is, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed since the game state command was received (from the end of the previous game), a credit return command has been received (credit settlement), and a BET command has been received ( A predetermined time has passed since the BET operation was performed, a BET cancellation command was received (BET cancellation), and a predetermined time has passed without receiving a reel stop command (from the start of the game) after receiving the winning status notification command This means that a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a new reel stop command after receiving a reel stop command (after a stop operation).

  On the other hand, when the game sound is muted, a canceling process (step Ss602) is performed in which the muting is canceled when a predetermined canceling condition is satisfied and the game sound is output at a normal volume. The predetermined release condition refers to, for example, receiving a BET command, receiving a winning status notification command, receiving a reel stop command, and the like.

  Next, the content of the volume adjustment process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 will be described based on the timing charts shown in FIGS.

  Here, for example, an example of the volume adjustment processing of the continuous game sound effect during the time when the above-described continuous performance is performed and after the previous game is finished until the next game is started is shown in FIG. This will be described based on the timing chart (a). First, when the continuous production is started, the sound output is started at the maximum volume (MAX, hereinafter, also simply referred to as “maximum”) at the set volume level, according to the type of the continuous production. ). Thereafter, the game progress is interrupted when 30 seconds have passed without setting the bet amount (ta3) from the time when the predetermined game in the continuous production is ended and the gaming state command is acquired (ta2). As a result, the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced).

  After that, when the player performs a betting number setting operation and obtains a BET command (ta4), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum (original Back to the level).

  Next, an example of the case where the credit is settled before 30 seconds have elapsed since the last game was finished when the above-described continuous performance is being performed is shown in the timing chart of FIG. Based on First, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tb1). Thereafter, at the predetermined time point before the time point (tb4) when 30 seconds have passed without the setting of the betting number from the time point when the predetermined game in the continuous production is finished and the gaming state command is acquired (tb2). When the credit is settled by the settlement operation by the player (tb3), the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (mute). When a predetermined notification sound is output when credits are settled and medals are paid out, the volume of the notification sound is the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch. Generate at the maximum volume. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hear the notification sound that the credit is settled, compared to the case where the notification sound is generated at the volume level set by the volume switch. And after the sound output of the said notification sound is complete | finished, you may make the volume of the continuous game effect sound currently sounding into the minimum (mute).

  After that, when the player performs a betting number setting operation and obtains a BET command (tb5), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is raised to the original level, that is, the maximum (original Back to the level).

  Next, an example in which the bet number is set before 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the previous game, and then a predetermined time has elapsed without setting a new bet number is shown in FIG. A description will be given based on the timing chart of a).

  First, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tc1). After that, the bet amount is set before the time (tc4) when 30 seconds elapse from the time when the predetermined game in the continuous production ends and the gaming state command is acquired (tc4). When the BET command transmitted based on this is acquired (tc3), the current volume is maintained without decreasing the volume of the continuous game sound effect.

  Next, at the time when 30 seconds have passed without acquiring a new BET command or winning status notification command after the bet number is set and the BET command is acquired at tc3 (tc5), Minimize the volume of continuous game sound effects.

  After that, when the bet number setting operation is performed by the player and a new BET command is acquired (tc6), the progress of the game is resumed, and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum. (Return to the original level).

  Next, based on the timing chart of FIG. 40 (b), an example in which the bet amount is set before 30 seconds have passed since the previous game ended and the bet amount is settled after that. explain.

  First, when the continuous production is started, the sound output is started with the maximum volume (MAX) of the continuous game effect sound corresponding to the type of the continuous production (td1). Thereafter, the bet amount is set before the time (td5) when 30 seconds elapse (td2) from the time when the predetermined game in the continuous performance is finished and the gaming state command is acquired. When the BET command transmitted based on this is acquired (td3), the current volume is maintained without decreasing the volume of the continuous game sound effect.

  Next, from the time when the bet number is set at td3 and the BET command is acquired, the time before 30 seconds elapses (td6) without acquiring a new BET command or winning status notification command, When the player has settled the bet amount (BET cancellation) (td4), the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced). When a predetermined notification sound is output when a bet is canceled and a bet is returned, the volume of the notification sound is the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch. Generate at the maximum volume. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hear the notification sound that the BET cancellation has been performed, compared to the case where the notification sound is generated at the volume level set by the volume switch. And after the sound output of the said notification sound is complete | finished, you may make the volume of the continuous game effect sound currently sounding into the minimum (mute).

  After that, when the bet number setting operation is performed by the player and a new BET command is acquired (td7), it is assumed that the progress of the game is resumed, and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum. (Return to the original level).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 91a starts timing after the previous game ends, and if the BET command is acquired before 30 seconds have elapsed since the timing has started, the BET command The time is newly started at the time when the game is acquired, and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is lowered even when 30 seconds elapse without acquiring a new BET command or winning status notification command from that time. However, when a BET command is acquired before 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of timing, it is not necessary to newly start timing.

  Here, an example of the volume adjustment process as a modification of the present embodiment will be described based on the timing chart of FIG. 41. When the continuous effect is started, the continuous game sound effect according to the type of the continuous effect is displayed. The sound output is started at the maximum volume (MAX) (te1). Thereafter, the bet number is set before the time (te4) when 30 seconds elapse (te2) from the time when the predetermined game in the big bonus is completed and the gaming state command is acquired. When the BET command transmitted based on the received command is acquired (te3), the current volume is maintained without lowering the volume of the continuous game sound effect, and is kept as it is without starting a new timing from that point. To do.

  Next, at the time (te4) when 30 seconds have elapsed without acquiring the winning status notification command from the time (te2) when the game ends in te2, the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced). To do.

  After that, when the game is started by the player and the winning status notification command is acquired (te5), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is raised to the original level, that is, the maximum ( Return to the original level).

  Next, an example of the volume adjustment processing of the continuous game sound effect after the game is started when the continuous performance is performed will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  For example, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tf1). After that, when a predetermined game is started during continuous production and a winning situation notification command is acquired (tf2), when a reel stop operation is performed and 60 seconds have elapsed without acquiring the reel stop command (tf3) ) At that time, it is assumed that a predetermined time of 60 seconds has passed without acquiring a reel stop command by the player since the game started, that is, the progress of the game is interrupted, Minimize the sound effect volume.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation on the first reel and obtains a reel stop command (tf4), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum. (Return to the original level).

  Next, an example of the volume adjustment processing of the continuous game sound effect after the stop operation of the first or second reel will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  For example, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tg1). Thereafter, after a predetermined game is started during continuous production and a winning status notification command is acquired (tg2), a stop operation of the first or second reel is performed and a reel stop command is acquired (tg3). When the second or third reel is stopped, that is, when 60 seconds have elapsed without acquiring a new reel stop command (tg4), the stop operation of the first or second reel is performed at that time. Assuming that the predetermined time of 60 seconds has passed without acquiring a new reel stop command, that is, the progress of the game is interrupted, the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced).

  After that, when the player performs a stop operation on the second or third reel and obtains a reel stop command (tg5), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is set to the original level, that is, Increase to maximum (return to original level).

  Next, in order to make it difficult for the driving tool to be connected, a description will be given of the restriction on the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. And the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are restricted from being released from each other. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500, the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a, and the connection between the board-side connector 622g and the cable-side connector 612g. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Next, the detailed structures of the board case 200 and the connector restricting member 500 that house the game control board 40 will be described.

  43 and 44 are exploded perspective views showing the board case 200 and the mounting base 250 for attaching the board case 200 to the housing forming the main body of the slot machine 1 and the connector restricting member 500. FIG. FIG. 46 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the attachment side member 510 and the connector cap 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 46, FIGS. 47B and 47C are cross-sectional views taken along the line BB in FIG. 46, and FIG. 49A is a perspective view showing a state where the connector cap is attached to the member 510, FIG. 49A is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 48, and FIG. 49B is a sectional view taken along the line D- in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the board case 200 includes a lower case 201 as a case main body that covers the back side of the game control board 40, and an upper case 203 that covers the mounting surface side of the game control board 40. And assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. The mounting surface of the game control board 40 is connected to electronic elements such as a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, and RAM 41c, and a cable-side connector provided at one end of a cable from another board, although not shown in detail. Many board-side connectors 620a to 620c are mounted.

  The lower case 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is opened by a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate.

  The two short side walls 201c of the lower case 201 are provided with two sealing pieces 211 and 211 protruding outward, and the other short side wall 201d has two pairs of locking portions. 210 protrudes outward. In addition, engagement grooves 212 are formed at both ends of the long side from the side wall 201d on the back surface of the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201 to engage engagement pieces 511 of the attachment side member 510 described later.

  The upper case 203 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the bottom surface is open, the center of the top surface bulges, and the step portions 203a and 203b are formed on both short sides. It is shaped like a box. The lower surface of the upper case 203 has the same shape as the lower case 201, and a space for accommodating the game control board 40 is formed inside by assembling the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 together.

  On the side wall 203c on one short side of the upper case 203, sealing pieces 231 and 231 are disposed outwardly at locations corresponding to the sealing pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side wall 201c on one short side of the lower case 201, respectively. The four sealing pieces 232 are provided to protrude outwardly at equal intervals between the sealing pieces 231 and 231. The other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203 is engaged with the pair of locking portions 210 at locations corresponding to the two pairs of locking portions 210 provided on the other short side wall of the lower case 201, respectively. Engaging engaging portions 230 are provided. Further, on the other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203, a locking piece 235 that engages with locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250, which will be described later, at a position outward from the engaging portion 230. 235 is provided.

  The step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides of the upper case 203 are formed with recesses 203e and 203f, respectively. In particular, the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the step portion 203b is accommodated in the substrate case 200. An insertion hole 234 through which the board-side connector 620a can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the gaming control board 40.

  The mounting base 250 is a member for fixing the substrate case 200 to a housing forming the main body of the slot machine 1. The mounting base 250 is made of synthetic resin, and, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, a bottom plate 250a formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201, and two of the peripheral edges of the upper plate The side walls 250b and 250c formed on the long edges are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is open. Screw holes 252 are formed at a plurality of locations on the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250, and a side wall 250d having a notch 250e at the center is formed on one short side of the bottom plate 250a. Are provided with a pair of guides 254, 254 from the notch 250e of the side wall 250d toward the center. Guide grooves 254a and 254a into which engaging portions 257 and 257 formed at both ends of a fixing member 255 described later are fitted are formed on the opposing surfaces of the guides 254 and 254, respectively.

  The fixing member 255 is made of a synthetic resin, and drooping pieces 255b and 255b extending downward (rearward in the figure) from both ends of the fixing piece 255a having four fixing holes 256 formed on the upper surface, and the drooping piece 255b. The engaging portions 257 and 257 are formed in a substantially U-shape formed in the left and right direction (up and down direction in the drawing) from both ends of the 255b. The fixing member 255 is attached to the attachment base 250 by fitting the locking portions 257 and 257 into the guide grooves 254a and 254a formed in the guides 254 and 254 of the attachment base 250, respectively.

  On the short side of the mounting base 250 on which the side wall 250d is formed, a locking column 253 having an inward locking claw 253a at the tip is provided upright from the bottom plate 250a, and on the opposite short side. Engagement holes 251 and 251 in which engagement holes 251 a and 251 a into which the engagement parts 230 of the upper case 203 are inserted are connected to the bottom plate 250 a are provided upright at both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the connector regulating member 500 is attached to the board case 200 and the cable side attached to the board side connector 620a. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the connector 610a, and the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, and the connector cover 520 is attached to the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a. Removal is regulated.

  The attachment-side member 510 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed into a shape that conforms to the surface shape of the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200, as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the short side where the engaging portion 230 of the upper case 203 is provided, and the shape thereof is the step portion 203b in the upper case 203 when attached to the board case 200. Standing piece that stands up from both ends of the base piece 510a that is in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f and that has a notch 512 that allows the cable-side connector 610a to escape and a cylindrical locking hole portion 513 that has a locking hole 513a inside. Upper pieces 510c and 510c that contact the upper surfaces of both end portions of the stepped portion 203b in the upper case 203 are extended through 510b and 510b, and are further engaged through side pieces 510d and 510d that hang down from both ends of the upper pieces 510c and 510c. The stoppers 257 and 257 have a shape extending inward, and the base piece 5 of the attachment-side member 510 is attached to the board case 200. 0a, upper piece 510c, the opposing surface is adapted to abut respectively on the bottom of the top surface and the recess 203f of the stepped portion 203b of the upper case 203 relative to the board case 200 of 510c.

  On the inner surface of the locking hole 513a in the locking hole 513, as shown in FIG. 46, a locking groove 514 is provided upward from the lower end of the locking hole 513a at a position opposed to the center. Yes. The locking groove 514 has a substantially L shape including a shallow groove portion 514a having a shallow depth from the lower end of the locking hole 513a and a deep groove portion 514b deeper than the shallow groove portion 514a, and the shallow groove portion 514a of the opposing locking grooves 514 and 514. 514a and deep groove portions 514b and 514b are formed at positions facing each other across the center. That is, the locking grooves 514 and 514 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center.

  The connector cover 520 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, when attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the substrate case 200, the cable connected to the substrate side connector 620a. A covering portion 521 having a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional view covering a part of the side connector 610a is formed, and one side surface 521a of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the covering portion 521 is formed with a locking hole portion 513 in the attachment side member 510. A locking cylinder 522 having substantially the same diameter as the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a is provided via the connection piece 522a.

  The lower end of one side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 contacts the upper surface of the base piece 510a when attached to the attachment-side member 510, and ribs 521b and 521b are provided on the back surface of the side surface 521a. The lower surface of 521b is also in contact with the upper surface of the base piece 510a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the locking cylinder 522 has an outward locking claw 523a formed at the tip at a position opposed to the center, and engagement portions 523 and 523 that can be elastically deformed inward. It has been. The engaging portions 523 and 523 have engaging holes 523a and 523a when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member 510 with the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a. The locking grooves 514 and 514 formed in the 513a are provided at positions that engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a.

  Next, the state of attachment of the connector restriction member 500 to the board case 200 and the state of attachment of the board case 200 to the housing will be described.

  First, the game control board 40 is accommodated in the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the board case 200 to be in a sealed state. In order to seal the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the engaging portions 230 of the corresponding upper case 203 are engaged with the two pairs of locking portions 210 of the lower case 201, respectively, One of the sealing pieces 211 of the case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw.

  As is well known, a one-way screw can be screwed by rotation in one direction, but cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. It is a screw. For this reason, when one sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw, either the sealing piece 211 or the sealing piece 231 is broken. Without this, these sticking cannot be released.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231, the longitudinal movement of the upper case 203 with respect to the lower case 201 is restricted, and as a result, the upper case 203 is engaged with the locking portion 210 of the lower case 201. The release of the engagement of the joint portion 230 is also restricted, and the upper case 201 and the lower case 203 are integrated with the game control board 40 accommodated therein, and the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231 are broken. Otherwise, it will not be possible to open.

  Next, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is sealed. The attachment-side member 510 is elastically deformed on both side pieces 510 d and 510 d outward and attached to the stepped portion 203 b of the upper case 203. Then, by releasing the elastic deformation, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 are attached by engaging with the engaging grooves 212 and 212 on the back surface of the lower case 201. At this time, the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c and 510c of the attachment-side member 510 are in contact with the top surface of the step 203b and the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the upper case 203, respectively, and the notch 512 provided in the base piece 510a The board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 is connected to the inside of the board case 200 through the notch 512 and the insertion hole 234 so as to coincide with the insertion hole 234 provided in the recess 203f of the upper case 203. To be exposed to the outside.

  Next, the mounting screw 259 is screwed into the housing side wall through the screw hole 252 of the mounting base 250 to fix the mounting base 250 to the housing, and the locking portions 257 and 257 of the fixing member 255 are fixed. The fixing member 255 is attached to the mounting base 250 by fitting into the engaging grooves 254a and 254a of the mounting base 250, respectively.

  Next, the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is assembled to the attachment base 250. Specifically, after inserting the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 into the locking holes 251a and 251a of the locking hole portions 251 and 251 of the mounting base 250, respectively, as shown in FIG. The substrate case 200 is accommodated between the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250, and the upper surface of the other end side step portion 203a of the substrate case 200 is locked by the locking claw 253a of the locking column 253, thereby fixing the substrate case 200. Temporarily fix to the mounting base 250. In this state, the four sealing pieces 232 provided at one end of the upper case 203 and the fixing holes 256 of the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 are in corresponding positions, and in this state, any of the sealing pieces The sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255 are fixed by screwing the aforementioned one-way screw into the corresponding fixing hole 256 from above the H.232.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the sealing piece fixing member 255, the movement of the substrate case 200 in the removal direction from the mounting base 250 at the end of the substrate case 200 on the sealing piece 232 side is restricted and the locking is performed. Since the horizontal movement of the substrate case 200 toward the sealing piece 232 side is also restricted by the pillar 253, the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251 a and 251 a of the mounting base 250. It becomes impossible. Further, in this state, the screw holes 252 of the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250 are all covered with the substrate case 200, and access to the mounting screws 259 is impossible, and the mounting base 250 cannot be removed from the housing. Become. In this way, the substrate case 200 to which the attachment-side member 510 is attached is fixed to the housing via the attachment base 250, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing unless the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 is broken. It will be in the state which cannot be removed from.

  Further, when the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be removed, as shown in FIG. 49A, the side piece 510d of the attachment side member 510 is provided. 510d abuts against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b, 250c of the mounting base 250 and is held between them so that deformation of the both side pieces 510d, 510d of the mounting side member 510 outward is restricted. It becomes impossible to remove from 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 45, the cable 600a is connected to the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 exposed through the insertion hole 234 of the board case 200 and the notch 512 of the base piece 510a in the attachment-side member 510. After connecting the cable side connector 610a, with the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a connected, as shown in FIG. 48, the covering portion 521 of the connector cover 520 covers the upper side of the cable side connector 610a. Then, the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513 a of the locking hole 513 in the attachment side member 510. As a result, the engaging portions 523 and 523 of the locking cylinder 522 abut against the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a and elastically deform inward. At this time, when the engaging portions 523 and 523 are positioned to cover the cable-side connector 610a with the covering portion 521, the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a among the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the inner surface of the locking hole 513a. The locking cylinder 522 is further fitted, and the locking claws 523a and 523a at the tips of the engaging portions 523 and 523 reach the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the engaging grooves 514 and 514, As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the inward elastic deformation of the engaging portions 523 and 523 is released, and the engaging claws 523a and 523a engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, respectively. The upward movement is restricted, and the side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 is brought into contact with the side surfaces of the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a, so that the engagement of the locking cylinder 522 is achieved. By rotating relative to the hole 513 is restricted, and ligated with the mounting member 510 and the connector cover 520, a state of integrated connector regulating member 500 is formed. In this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are covered with the locking hole portion 513, it is impossible to elastically deform the engaging portions 523 and 523 inward from the outside, and the connector cover 520 or the attachment side member Unless 510 is broken, the connector cover 520 cannot be removed from the attachment side member 510.

  When the connector cover 520 is detachably attached to the attachment side member 510, a part of the upper surface of the cable side connector 610a is covered by the covering portion 521 as shown in FIGS. The movement of 610a in the pulling direction from the board side connector 620a is restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is restricted.

  As described above, with the mounting side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing, and then the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a. By attaching a part of 620a to the attachment side member 510 so as to cover from above, the cable side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board side connector 620a.

  Next, a situation when the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a is released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a, the attachment side member 510 or the cable cover 520 is broken and the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment side member 510, or the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is removed. Alternatively, it is necessary to break the fixing member 255, remove the board case 200 from the mounting base 250, and remove the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 attached thereto from the board case 200.

  For example, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a due to a failure of the cable 600a or the like, the latter method is used when the board case 200 is removed by the former method and replaced by the board failure or the like. Just remove it.

  First, when replacing the cable 600a, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a, a method for removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment-side member 510 will be described. First, a connector such as a nipper is used. The connecting piece 522a that connects the covering portion 521 of the cover 520 and the locking cylinder 522 is broken. As a result, the covering portion 521 is separated and the locking cylinder 522 can be rotated with respect to the locking hole portion 513. In this state, by rotating the locking cylinder 522 counterclockwise as viewed from above, the engaging portions 523 and 523 move from the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the engaging grooves 514 and 514 to the positions of the deep groove portions 514b and 514b. As shown in FIG. 47 (a), from the state where the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the locking claws 523a and 523a The shallow groove portions 514a and 514a are disengaged. As a result, the locking cylinder 522 can be moved upward. As shown in FIG. 47C, when the locking cylinder 522 is pulled upward, the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the deep grooves 514b and 514b. However, in this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are exposed, the engaging portions 523 and 523 can be elastically deformed inward, and the engaging claws 523a can be elastically deformed inwardly. 523a and the deep groove portions 514b and 514b are disengaged, and the locking cylinder 522 can be detached from the attachment side member 510, whereby the connector cover 520 is completely separated from the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the cable side connector 610a due to is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a is released. Door will be able to.

  When the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment-side member 510, the covering portion 521 and the locking cylinder 522 are broken, and once broken, the original state is not restored. Therefore, the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a There will be traces of unlocking.

  Next, when it is necessary to remove the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a when replacing the whole board case 200, a method of removing the attachment side member 510 from the board case 200 together with the connector cover 520 will be described. The sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the end of the substrate case 200 on the side of the sealing piece 232 can be moved away from the mounting base 250, so that the locking claw 253 a of the locking column 253 and the stepped portion 203 e of the substrate case 200 Release the engagement. As a result, it is possible to move the sealing piece 232 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the board case 200 is detached from the attachment base 250, and the side pieces 510d and 510d of the attachment side member 510 can be deformed outwardly, without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. The attachment-side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200. With this, the attachment-side member 510 is removed from the board case 200 in a state of being integrated with the connector cover 520, whereby the cable-side connector 610a is removed by the connector cover 520. Since the restriction on the movement in the direction is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a can be released.

  In order to remove the attachment side member 510 from the substrate case 200 also by this method, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 needs to be broken. Therefore, a trace of releasing the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a remains.

  Further, according to this method, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken and remains on the fixing member 255, but the attachment side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200 without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. Therefore, by attaching the attachment side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled to the new board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated for replacement, the cable side connector 610a and the board side in the new board case 200 are attached. The connection with the connector 620a is disabled, the new fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250, and the new board case 200 with the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled is mounted on the mounting base. Attached to 250, the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed. In Rukoto, becomes again impossible removably mounting member 510, when releasing the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the substrate-side connector 620a is in a state leave its mark. That is, in such a case, the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 can be reused.

  In this embodiment, the engaging portions 511 and 511 of the attachment side member 510 are engaged with the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200 in a state where the engaging portions 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. When the attachment member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 and the substrate case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, the attachment side member 510 side Since the pieces 510d and 510d abut against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b and 250c of the attachment base 250 and are sandwiched, the deformation of the attachment-side members 510 on both sides 510d and 510d to the outside is restricted. Although it is a structure which cannot be removed from the substrate case 200, for example, a part of the attachment side member can be screwed or removed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. The board case 200 is fixed to the casing by fixing the board case 200 to the casing (mounting base) so that the screws and the locking pins are concealed. Thus, the attachment-side member may be restricted from being removed from the substrate case 200, and the attachment-side member is fixed to the housing in a state where the attachment-side member is attached to the substrate case 200. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the configuration cannot be removed from the substrate case 200.

Next, the detailed structure of the connector restricting member 650 will be described.
50 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 constituting the connector restricting member 650. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member 680 is assembled to the mounting table 660. 52A is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 51, and FIG. 52B is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the connector restricting member 650 includes a mounting table 660 on which the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted, and a cover member 680 that covers the mounting table 660 from above. After accommodating the operation unit relay board 110, the cable side connectors 611a and 612g of the corresponding cables 600a and 601g are connected to the board side connectors 621a and 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and then the cover member 680 is attached to the case. By attaching to the body 610, removal of the cable side connectors 611a and 612g from the board side connectors 621a and 622g is restricted.

  The mounting table 660 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a larger diameter than the operation unit relay substrate 110. As shown in FIG. 50, board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c, 622d to 622f, and 622g are mounted on the operation unit relay board 110, both side faces on the long side of the mounting table 660, and short boards. The board side connectors 622a, 622b, 622c, and 622d to 622f whose insertion holes open in the horizontal direction with respect to the mounting surface in the operation part relay board 110 when the operation part relay board 110 is placed on one side surface of the side. Each of the locking holes 661 having the locking holes 661b is provided via the connection piece 661a so as to protrude outward, avoiding the portion where the 622g is located. On the inner peripheral surface of the locking hole 661b, a pair of locking claws 661c and 661c facing the center are formed at positions facing each other across the center.

  The cover member 680 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting table 660. On one long side, the cover member 680 is located at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110. A cover portion 681 that bulges toward the front side at a position corresponding to the board-side connectors 622a and 622b of the operation portion relay board 110 on the other long side. Cover portions 689 that bulge toward the front are formed at positions corresponding to 622c, 622g, and 622d to 622f, respectively.

  On the upper surface 681a of the cover portion 681, a notch 681b for releasing the cable 600a connected to the board side connector 621a, which is narrower than the long side of the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a, is formed on the outer side surface. Thereby, covering surfaces 681c and 681 are formed on both side ends of the upper surface 681a, respectively.

  The cover portion 688 has notches 682a for releasing the cables 612a and 612b connected to the board side connectors 622a and 622b, and the cover portion 689 has a cable 612c connected to the board side connector 622c. A notch 682b for releasing the cable, a notch 632c for releasing the cable 612g connected to the board side connector 622g, and a notch 682d for releasing the cables 612d to f connected to the board side connectors 622d to f are formed. Has been. In particular, the notch 682c for releasing the cable 612g connected to the board-side connector 622g is formed to be narrower than the length of the long side of the cable 601g, and both ends of the notch 682c are covered from the cover portion 689. Pieces 683 and 683 are respectively provided.

  Further, on both side surfaces on the long side of the cover member 680 and on one side surface on the short side, the locking holes are formed so as to protrude outward at positions corresponding to the locking holes 661 of the mounting table 660. A locking cylinder 684 having substantially the same diameter as the inner peripheral surface of 661b is provided via a connection piece 684a. Lock holes 684 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the lock cylinder 684 at locations corresponding to the pair of lock claws 661c provided on the inner periphery of the lock hole 661b. Can be combined.

  Next, the mounting state of the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 50, the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted on the mounting table 660, and the board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c. , 622d to 622f and 622g are connected to cable side connectors 611a, 612a, 612b, 612c, 612d to 612f and 612g, respectively. After connecting these cable side connectors to the board side connector, the cover member 680 is attached to the mounting table 660.

  Specifically, the locking cylinder 634 of the cover member 680 is fitted into the locking hole 661 b of the corresponding locking hole 661 of the mounting table 660. Then, by pushing the locking cylinder 634 into the locking hole 661b, the locking claw 661c in the locking hole 661b is engaged with the locking hole 684 of the locking cylinder 684. As a result, it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the locking claw 661c and the locking hole 684 from the outside, and as shown in FIG. 51, the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are connected to the locking hole. If the part 661 or the locking cylinder 634 is not broken, it is in a state where it is assembled so that it cannot be removed.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 52A, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 611a connected to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. Covered by the covering portions 681c and 681c of 680, the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the pulling direction from the board side connector 621a is restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 611a from the board side connector 621a is restricted. ing.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 52B, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable side connector 612g connected to the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 are covered. 680 covering pieces 683 and 683 are covered, and movement of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g is restricted, and removal of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g is restricted. ing.

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g are released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, a connecting piece 684a for connecting the locking cylinder 684 of the cover member 680 with a tool such as a nipper is provided. Break. As a result, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are separated, and the cover member 680 can be removed from the mounting table 660. By removing the cover member 680 from the mounting table 660, the covering portions 681c and 681c. The restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the unplugging direction is released, and the restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 612g in the unplugging direction by the covering pieces 683 and 683 is also released, so the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a are released. And the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g can be released.

  When the cover member 680 is removed from the mounting table 660, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are broken. Once the cover member 680 is broken, the original state is not obtained and the separated locking cylinder 684 is removed from the mounting table 660. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a and the connection between the cable-side connector 612g and the board-side connector 622g are released. It will be.

  Next, an operation test of each unit mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described. The effect control board 90 according to the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (game control board for testing) before shipment. .

  The operation test is performed by transmitting an inspection command designating a component to be operated and its operation mode from the command simulator. Also, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold cathode fluorescent lamp and other electrical components, a speaker, and a liquid crystal display 51 that are controlled by the sub-control unit 91, and an output port and its output. By designating the component corresponding to the port and its operation mode by the inspection command, the operation of the designated component can be inspected. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte. For example, in an inspection command for inspecting the operation of an electrical component, specify lighting and extinction as the operation mode, and if the electrical component is a component that can be lit in multiple colors, also specify the lighting color Is possible.

  Further, in one inspection command transmitted from the command simulator, only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode are specified. For this reason, when components having different output ports are operated simultaneously and inspected, it is necessary to continuously transmit inspection commands specifying the respective output ports. As a result, when performing a test to operate all the electrical components, it is necessary to send inspection commands continuously as many times as the number of electrical components, and the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested simultaneously. In this case, it is necessary to continuously transmit inspection commands corresponding to the number of parts to be tested.

  Therefore, as in the conventional slot machine, for example, when the storage area is allocated only for a number of times that does not overflow as a reception buffer assuming a normal game, for example, storage provided in the normal command transmission buffer In the case of the same level as the area, the number of parts to be tested simultaneously is limited, and the number of inspection commands transmitted from the command simulator is extremely limited, so that the operation test cannot be performed efficiently.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, a maximum of 128 can be stored as the reception buffer of the sub-control unit 91 assuming the number of test commands transmitted continuously when the operation test is performed. Storage area is provided. As a result, even when a large number of inspection commands are transmitted, they can be stored in the storage area, so that the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 16, a higher percentage is obtained when the red cherry is won at the same time as one of the bonuses than when the red cherry is not won at the same time, Control is performed to stop and display more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line. For this reason, it is possible to change the expectation that one of the bonuses is won simultaneously according to the number of “red cherry” symbols stopped and displayed on one winning line. As a result, for example, even after the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, any of the bonuses can be obtained by stopping and displaying the “red cherry” symbol on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. At the same time, the expectation for winning can be improved.

  (2) Further, the control to stop and display more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line is based on one winning line according to the internal winning situation and the reel stopping situation (and the stopped position of the stopped reel). This can be realized by designing a stop control table in which the number of drawn frames is set so that reel control is performed to change the expectation according to the number of “red cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed. For this reason, it is possible to easily design a control for stopping and displaying more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line.

  Also, for example, when the left reel 2L is finally stopped, even if the “red cherry” symbol of the left reel 2L is not stopped and no red cherry is won, the already stopped middle reel 2C and the right reel Depending on the number of “red cherry” symbols on the reel 2R that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, the expectation that one of the bonuses is won can be changed.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 16B, on the condition that one of the bonuses is simultaneously won, Three “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed. For this reason, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that three “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one winning line.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the winning lines on which the “red cherry” symbol is stopped are the winning lines L2 and L4 passing through the lower stage of the left reel 2L. It is possible to improve the expectation that one of the bonuses is won at the same time when the winning lines L1, L3, and L5 pass through the upper and middle stages of the left reel 2L.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the types of bonuses that are won simultaneously with the red cherry are 1 in the order of regular bonus, big bonus (2), and big bonus (1). The reel control is performed so that the ratio at which more “red cherries” symbols are stopped and displayed on the winning line is increased. Also, it can be said that the big bonus is a gaming state in which the degree of advantage is high for the player in that the prescribed number is larger than the regular bonus. In addition, it can be said that the big bonus (1) is a gaming state that has a high degree of advantage for the player in that the prescribed number is larger than that of the big bonus (2) and is controlled by RT after the end. Therefore, the greater the number of “Red Cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, the higher the expectation that bonuses that are controlled to a gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player will be won simultaneously. Can be made.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 15 (a), the type of bonus that is won at the same time as the red cherry is higher than the regular bonus when it is a big bonus. In the winning lines L1 and L3 that pass through the upper stage of the left reel 2L in proportion, and in the winning line L5 that passes through the middle stage of the left reel 2L at a higher rate with the big bonus (1) than the big bonus (2), The “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped. For this reason, depending on the type of the winning line on which the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change the expectation that the bonus controlled to the gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player is simultaneously won. it can.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the number of AT continuing games is determined according to the distribution of the mode being transferred. Therefore, depending on the type of mode being transferred, the player will have a different sense of expectation with respect to being controlled by the AT and more times being determined as the number of AT continuing games. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (8) In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41 is a command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91. A storage area is provided in which a larger number of commands can be stored than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer. Accordingly, when an operation test is performed by connecting an operation test board such as a command simulator to the effect control board 90 in order to check whether the sub-control unit 91 operates normally during development or before shipment. Even in the case where inspection commands are transmitted continuously, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be a storage area of a normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, a normal game. The number of storage areas allocated in such a number that does not overflow (16 commands in this embodiment) is not limited, and the limit of the storage area of the reception buffer (128 in this embodiment). A large number of inspection commands can be continuously transmitted up to the number of commands), so that the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

  (9) Although it is necessary to open the front door in order to perform some illegal act on the internal components of the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in this embodiment, when the front door is opened, Since the fact is notified, it is possible to effectively prevent such fraud and detect it early even if fraud is made.

  Further, the CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, it only transmits a door command indicating the detection state after the change. Whether or not the front door is opened is not determined from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 is based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the CPU 41a. Whether or not the front door is open is determined, and the door opening notification is made based on the determination result. For this reason, when notifying the opening of the front door, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the front door 2b is open from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (such as a chattering prevention determination of the door opening detection switch 25). This is unnecessary, and the control load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  (10) In the volume adjustment process, in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 91b, game sound corresponding to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 is generated from the speakers 53 and 54 at the volume level set by the volume switch. An example in which the above process is performed has been described. Then, a predetermined notification sound is emitted when the payment is performed such as when the payment of the credit is performed and the medal is paid out, or when the bet is canceled and the bet is returned. In this case, the volume of the notification sound is generated at the maximum volume level at the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch. As a result, a notification sound indicating that the settlement has been performed is generated at the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch. Therefore, when the volume level is set to a low level by the volume switch. Even if it exists, it can be made easy to hear for the player.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 37, when one of the winning combinations is won, the reel LED corresponding to the constituent symbol of the corresponding combination among the reel LEDs 55a to 55i is controlled to be lit. Therefore, it is possible to easily notify the winning combination and the type of the winning combination. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 38, in the reel LED lighting control, the sub-control unit 91 receives a gaming state command transmitted when the next game can be started (when the betting number can be set). It starts on the condition. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the lighting control of the reel LED is controlled by the freeze state, so that the sub control unit 91 has received the delay command transmitted when the transition to the game preparation state is delayed. It is also started on the condition. For this reason, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the processing load is concentrated at a predetermined timing by performing a plurality of processes in parallel at the end of the game as in the prior art. Further, the lighting control of the reel LED is performed by the player indicating that the player has expressed his intention to start the next game such that the bet number is set and the BET command is received by the sub-control unit 91, or the checkout switch 10 Because it is terminated when there is an intention from the player to interrupt the game such that the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET cancellation command or a credit return command transmitted in response to the operation of the player. , It can be prevented from being performed continuously.

  (12) In the present embodiment, an external output signal output from the game control board 40 is output to the hall device. These external output signals include a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and the setting change signal among these external output signals are output. The input error signal and the payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  (13) In the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the game control board accommodated in the board case 200 is obtained by attaching the connector restricting member 500 including the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 to the board case 200. The board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a are restricted from being detached, and in this state, the board case 200 is attached to the attachment base 250, and the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed to each other. If the removal of the connector regulating member 500 from the board is restricted and the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken to release the fixation between the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250), the board side The cable side connector 610a cannot be removed from the connector 620a. In other words, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace that the sealing piece 232 is broken, and a fraudulent instrument such as a driving instrument cannot be connected without leaving a trace. It will be possible to reliably discover that it may have been

  Further, when the game control board 40 is replaced together with the board case 200 containing the game control board 40 due to a failure or the like, the sealing piece 232 is broken to fix the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). If released, the connector restricting member 500 can be detached from the board case 200 and the cable side connector 610a can be removed from the board side connector 620a. Therefore, the connector restricting member 500 can be destroyed or the board case 200 can be destroyed. The cable-side connector 610a can be separated from the board-side connector 620a without opening.

  Further, the connector restricting member 500 is composed of an attachment side member 510 and a connector cover 520. After the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, and the board is in that state. The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a by being attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to cover a part of the cable-side connector 620a from above. Is connected to the board-side connector 620a, and then the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 of the attachment-side member 510 located around the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 520 is simply attached to the attachment side member 510. Since part of the cable-side connector 610a is covered and the movement of the cable-side connector 610a in the unplugging direction is restricted, the assembly work is reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted. it can.

  Further, even when the game control board 40 is housed in the board case 200, it is only necessary to connect the cable side connector 610a to the board side connector 620a as it is, and then attach the connector cover 520. In this case, the assembly work can be more effectively reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted.

  In addition, the connector cover 510 does not cover the entire connection portion between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a, but covers only a part of the cable-side connector 610a in the pulling direction side. Not only can the connector 610a be securely removed from the board-side connector 620a, but also the material required for manufacturing the connector cover 510 can be reduced.

  Further, since the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, the structure of the connector cover 520 and the attachment side member 510 can be simplified. A plurality of stop cylinders 522 may be provided, and a locking hole 513a may be provided at a corresponding position on the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 may be attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations. By doing so, the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations across the connection portion between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a. The removal and removal of the side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated.

  In addition, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, but a rib that contacts the surface of the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510 is provided on one side wall of the connector cover 520. Since 521b and 521b are formed and the movement of the connector cover 520 is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be reliably restricted.

  In addition, inwardly engaging portions 511 and 511 are formed at both ends extending from the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510, and the engaging portions 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. In this state, the mounting member 510 is attached to the board case 200 by being assembled to the board case 200 and engaged with the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the board case 200. Since the member 500 can be attached to the board case 200 without using other members such as screws and pins, the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, when the attachment side member 510 constituting the connector restricting member 500 is attached to the board case 200, the opposing surfaces of the attachment side member 510 to the base case 510 a and the upper pieces 510 c, 510 c with respect to the board case 200 are the steps in the upper case 203. The upper surface of the portion 203b and the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f are in contact with each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized parts and the like from being attached between the connector restricting member 500 and the surface of the board case 200.

  Further, since the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500 are both made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board case 200 may be impaired by the connector restricting member 500. Therefore, there is no problem in monitoring the game control board 40. Further, even when an unauthorized part is attached to the gap between the connector restricting member 500 and the board case 200, it can be easily found.

  In the present embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. Connection between the side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g. The restriction member 500 and the connector restriction member 650 are used for restriction. As a result, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an illegal driving tool and connected to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 for illegal actions relating to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is difficult to carry out fraudulent activities such as inputting / outputting various signals, so that illegal business operations can be effectively prevented.

  Further, in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200, the connection piece 522a of the connector cover 520, and the connection piece 684a of the cover member 680 are broken. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. , The above fraud can be more effectively suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool, and the game control board 40 is connected. Since it is difficult to perform an illegal act such as causing the main control unit 41 to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game, it is possible to effectively prevent an illegal business operation.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34c that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game, and the game Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, and 34b for which signals are output from the game control board 40 according to the progress, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connections between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the release of the connectors, but the start lever 7 and the game control board The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection with 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors. In addition, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel is operated after the reel starts rotating, only the connector connection between the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R and the game control board 40 is restricted. The same effect can be obtained even if a member is provided to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110 are connected to the main control part 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game. Are connected by a single cable 600a. Therefore, by restricting the connector connection between the board-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 620a of the game control board 40, that is, only one connector connection is released. The release of the connection between the signal lines can be restricted, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Even when a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected via a plurality of cables, the board-side connector is connected. A plurality of parts are prepared for restricting the release of these connector connections by restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board-side connectors and the plurality of cable-side connectors with a single part, as well as being arranged in close proximity. There is no need, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 and the board side connector 621a of the operation part relay board 110 is released, and the operation unit relay board. Since the release of the connection between the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g connecting the 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 is simultaneously restricted by one connector restricting member 650, these There is no need to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of a plurality of connector connections, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  (14) In the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 also monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 during a power failure, and the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor. When the state of electrical connection with the terminal 31 is released, a disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to confirm the disconnection flag at the time of activation. The storage state of the disconnection flag is acquired based on the reply from the accompanying disconnection monitoring IC 50, and when the disconnection flag is stored, that is, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game and the area of the RAM 41c. All areas among CPU41a excluding the space in use to initialize, becomes impossible return to the original state.

  On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of a game shop business.

  In the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, input / output of signals that are necessary for the progress of the game is performed. Electronic components to be made (for example, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. in a configuration in which the reel does not stop until the reel is stopped after the start of rotation of the reel as in this embodiment) Even if monitoring is performed, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 has an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the electronic component (the inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. Between the electronic control unit (injection medal sensor 31) and the game control board 40, which monitors the general connection state and inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game when the CPU 41a starts. When the disconnection is determined, the RAM 41c is initialized to prevent unauthorized sales by the game store. As shown in FIG. 66, the backup power source of the main control unit 41 is connected to the game control board. 40, the cable 600a for wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110 and the input unit. Via the cable 601g for connecting the cable sensor 31 to the wiring sensor, and further turned back by the inserted medal sensor 31, and returned to the game control board 40 again via the cable 601g, the operation part relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and the main control part 41 The connector may be connected between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off. Is released even at one location, the backup power supply line is disconnected, the data in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 cannot be retained, and is lost. In other words, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection, the slot machine set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool is provided to the player at the start of the operation of the game shop. It is possible to prevent such illegal sales.

  Note that when the backup power is returned from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via the inserted medal sensor 31 and supplied to the main control unit 41, the connector connection therebetween is released. Although the data in the RAM 41c is lost, an electronic component (for example, the start switch 7 or after starting the reel rotation as in the present embodiment after input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game) The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the operation is via a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which is not configured to stop the reel until a reel stop operation is performed.

  Capacitors and batteries that store backup power are mounted on electronic component mounting boards and relay boards (operation unit relay board 110, etc.) for these electronic parts, which are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. A backup power supply line from a capacitor or a battery mounted on the mounting board or the relay board is connected to the game control board through a cable together with a signal line of the electronic component and supplied to the main control unit 41. Even in this case, since the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection between the mounting board or the relay board and the game control board 40 is released, the same effect as described above is obtained. In addition, the game control board 40 can be backed up via a cable from a capacitor or battery mounted on the mounting board or relay board. Therefore, in order to continue supplying the backup power to the main control unit 41 when the cable is disconnected, it is necessary to short-circuit the backup power supply line across the boards. Since it becomes very difficult to release the connector connection in a state in which the backup power supply is continuously supplied, the connection of the driving tool can be effectively prevented.

  (15) In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is elected before the power failure, the CPU 41a elects the special role. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and the notification effect indicates a prize indicating that the special role is won. The information is continuously executed until the information command is received, that is, until the winning special combination is won.

  (16) Further, the sub-control unit 91 is in the effect state even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized. Even if another command is received, the production control is not performed accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing the gaming machine with the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool at the start of the business of the game shop.

  In addition, since the announcement effect is continuously executed until the winning information command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, the winning of the special role, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  (17) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, a bonus mode effect, a countdown effect, an RT effect, an AT effect, a resurrection effect, and a specific mode effect corresponding to a specific type of mode among a plurality of types. In a state where a continuous game sound effect is continuously output when a continuous production such as the above is executed, a predetermined time of 30 seconds is set without setting the bet amount after the previous game ends. When the time has elapsed, that is, not only when the state in which the operation related to the progress of the game is not performed after the previous game is completed continues for 30 seconds, which is a predetermined time, but also the credit settlement operation or the settlement switch 10 by the settlement switch 10. The volume of the continuous game sound effect is also reduced by performing the return operation of the betting number by. That is, in a state where a continuous game sound effect is being produced, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is set according to the player's intention even before the predetermined time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the end of the previous game. Since it can be lowered, there is no inconvenience to surrounding players even if the game is interrupted.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated effectively for 60 seconds after the game starts, that is, when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start to rotate. Alternatively, the rotation of any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and after the display result is derived on the variable display unit corresponding to the stopped reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the display result is not yet derived. If there is a display unit, the volume of the game sound is increased when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R has not been operated effectively for 60 seconds since the last stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R was operated effectively. By lowering, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In the state where the continuous game sound effect is being output, after the volume of the continuous game sound effect is reduced once in one game, the game is resumed in the game and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is restored. After that, when the reel stop operation corresponding to one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed again, the state in which the reel stop operation corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being displayed in a variable manner is not performed is a predetermined volume reduction. It may be configured such that the volume of the game sound is lowered even when a volume reduction waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) shorter than the waiting time of 60 seconds continues.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, the demonstration effect and the history display effect are not executed during the execution of the continuous effect. In other words, the reading of the demonstration effect production data and the history display production effect data from the CGROM 142 and the writing to the production data area are prohibited. The data is not overwritten and deleted from the effect data area. Since it is not erased, there is no need to read the effect data of the continuous effect from the CGROM 142 and write it in the execution effect data area.

  For this reason, in order to execute a demonstration effect or a history display effect that is not directly related to the current game progress, the effect data of the continuous effect with a large amount of data is read from the CGROM 142, and the execution effect of the temporary storage memory 155 is executed. The overhead of processing to write in the data area is not duplicated. Since the operations of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 are also invalidated during the execution of the continuous production, the production mode is not switched, and the production data corresponding to the same situation is obtained only by the production mode being different. It is also possible to prevent the overhead of having to read from and write to the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155.

  Further, since the process for performing the continuous effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side, the control burden for performing the process on the game control board 40 side can be shared with the effect control board 90 side, and the control on the game control board 40 side The burden can be reduced.

Second Embodiment In the first embodiment, when a red cherry is won at the same time as one of the bonuses, a higher percentage is given to one winning line when it is won at the same time as one of the bonuses. The example in which the control for stopping and displaying more “red cherry” symbols is performed by the reel control has been described. However, a higher percentage of red cherry symbols on one winning line will be stopped and displayed at a higher rate when red cherry is won at the same time as one of the bonuses than when it is not won at the same time as one of the bonuses. The control is not limited to that performed by reel control, but may be performed by adjusting the lottery target combination and the winning probability. Below, a higher percentage of “Red Cherry” symbols will be displayed in a stop on the winning line when Red Cherry is won at the same time as one of the bonuses than when it is not won at the same time as any of the bonuses. An example in which the control is performed by adjusting the lottery object combination and the winning probability will be described.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment is omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment are mainly described.

  FIG. 53 is a view for explaining the types of winning combinations in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the combinations of symbols in the variable display device 2. In the slot machine according to the second embodiment, the winning combination includes red cherry (1), red cherry (2), and red cherry (3).

  The red cherry (1) is the same as the role of red cherry in the first embodiment, and in any gaming state, when the “red cherry” symbol is derived on any winning line for the left reel 2L, a prize is won. Thus, three medals are paid out per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT.

  Red Cherry (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red Cherry-Red Cherry-Any” is aligned on any winning line in any gaming state, and 3 per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT. A medal is paid out. When the red cherry (2) is won, a total of six medals are paid out per winning line because the red cherry (1) is won at the same time.

  Red Cherry (3) is awarded when the combination of “Red Cherry-Red Cherry-Red Cherry” is aligned on any winning line in any gaming state, and per winning line in the initial gaming state and during RT. Three medals will be paid out. When the red cherry (3) is won, a total of nine medals are paid out per winning line because the red cherry (1) and the red cherry (2) are simultaneously won.

  When one of the red cherries (1) to (3) is won during the big bonus or regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out per winning line. As described above, even if one of the red cherries (1) to (3) is won in the internal lottery, if the red cherry (1) is selected, the stop switch 8L must be operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win a prize. There will be no winnings. Further, red cherry (2) will not be won unless the stop switches 8L and 8C are operated at an appropriate timing to allow winning. Further, the red cherry (3) will not be won unless the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning. This is because, in any of the reels 2L to 2R, there is a region where the “red cherry” symbols constituting the red cherries (1) to (3) are not arranged within seven frames.

  As described later, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus are respectively red cherry (1), red cherry (1) + red cherry (2) (hereinafter, red cherry ( 1) + (2), red cherry (1) (2) may be indicated), or red cherry (1)-(3) (red cherry (1)-(3)) (1), red cherry (2), and red cherry (3) are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination) and are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination and an internal lottery is performed. Therefore, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus overlap with red cherry (1), red cherry (1) + (2), and red cherry (1) to (3), respectively. You will win. Further, as for the black cherry, red cherry (1) and red cherry (1) + (2) are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery. Therefore, the black cherry is won by overlapping with the red cherry (1) or the red cherry (1) + (2).

  Next, internal lottery in the second embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery in the second embodiment, the winning combination table stored in advance in the ROM 41b is referred to as in the internal lottery in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the winning combination table in the second embodiment, when the gaming state is the initial gaming state, big bonus (1) + red cherry (1), big bonus (1) + red cherry (1) + (2) Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1)-(3), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry (1), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry (1) + (2), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry (1)-(3), Regular Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1), Regular Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1) + (2), Regular Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1) to (3), grape, banana, red cherry (1), red cherry (1) + (2), red cherry (1) + black cherry, red cherry (1) + (2) + black cherry, Replays are read sequentially as lottery targets And it is configured to be issued.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is the initial gaming state in the second embodiment. For example, when the set value is 1, when the target combination of the internal lottery is big bonus (1) + red cherry (1), “5” is big bonus (1) + red cherry (1) + (2 ) When “35” is big bonus (1) + red cherry (1) to (3), and “54” is when big bonus (2) + red cherry (1). “33” when “12” is the big bonus (2) + red cherry (1) + (2), and “49” when the big bonus (2) + red cherry (1) to (3). Is regular bonus (1) + red cherry (1), “20” is regular bonus (1) + red cherry (1) + (2), and “30” is regular bonus (1 ) + Red cherry (1) to (3) “5461” when grapes, “655” when bananas, “387” when red cherries (1), “50” when red cherries (1) + (2) Is "50" when it is red cherry (1) + black cherry, "44" when it is red cherry (1) + (2) + black cherry, "8977" when it is replay, Obtained as the number of judgment values. FIG. 54 also shows the number of determination values of each lottery target acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  In FIG. 54, the number of determination values in the initial gaming state is shown, but in the other gaming states, it is the same as that shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and (c). For example, when the gaming state is RT, “38000” is acquired as the number of replay determination values, and the number of determination values shown in FIG. 54 for other combinations is acquired. Further, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, “59578” is acquired as the number of grape determination values, and the number of determination values shown in FIG. 54 is acquired for the other combination (small combination).

  Referring to FIG. 54, red cherry (3) is configured to be read and lottery as a lottery target role at the same time as red cherry (1), red cherry (2), and any bonus. ing. In addition, the cherry (2) is configured to be read and won at the same time as the red cherry (1) as the winning combination.

  In addition, when red cherry (1) is not won simultaneously with any bonus, the ratio of winning red cherry (2) simultaneously is as follows: red cherry (1), red cherry (1) + (2), red in FIG. Based on the number of determination values of cherry (1) + black cherry, red cherry (1) + (2) + black cherry, (50 + 44) / (387 + 50 + 50 + 44) ≈17%. On the other hand, when red cherry (1) is won at the same time as one of the bonuses, the ratio of simultaneously winning red cherry (2) is the big bonus (1) + red cherry (1) in FIG. ) + Red Cherry (1) + (2), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1)-(3), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry (1), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry (1 ) + (2), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry (1)-(3), Regular Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1), Regular Bonus (1) + Red Cherry (1) + (2), Based on the number of determination values of regular bonus (1) + red cherry (1) to (3), (35 + 54 + 33 + 49 + 30 + 44) / (5 + 35 + 54 + 12 + 33 + 49 + 20 + 30 + 44) ≈86%. For this reason, it is more likely that red cherry (1) will win the red cherry (2) at the same time than red cherry (1) will not win the bonus at the same time. And the number of determination values (winning probability) for the combination of the lottery object combination.

  Further, when red cherry (1) and red cherry (2) are simultaneously elected, the percentage of red cherry (3) being simultaneously elected is 0% when the bonus is not simultaneously won and when the bonus is simultaneously won ( 54 + 49 + 44) / (35 + 54 + 33 + 49 + 30 + 44) = 60%. Thus, when red cherry (1) wins simultaneously with red cherry (2) and any bonus, red cherry (3) wins at a higher rate than red cherry (3) won at the same time. Is set to As a result, when the red cherry (1) is simultaneously won with the bonus, the “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one winning line at a higher rate than when the bonus is not simultaneously won with the bonus. Can be controlled.

  The red cherry (2) and the red cherry (3) are each set with the number of determination values so that the winning percentage is the highest at the same time as the big bonus (1) and the winning percentage is the lowest at the same time as the regular bonus. ing. For this reason, the type of bonus that is won simultaneously according to the number of “Red Cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, that is, which of Red Cherry (1) to (3) is won. However, it is possible to change a sense of expectation that the bonus is controlled to a gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player.

  In the second embodiment, the number of determination values shown in FIG. 54 is acquired, and an internal lottery is performed. Here, when the number of determination values shown in FIG. 54 is acquired and the internal lottery is performed, the winning probability of each of the red cherries (1) to (3) and the winning of each of the red cherries (1) to (3) The bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time and the bonus non-winning ratio at the time of winning each of the red cherries (1) to (3) will be described. FIG. 55 shows the winning probability of each of red cherries (1) to (3), the bonus simultaneous winning ratio of each of red cherries (1) to (3), and the winning of each of red cherries (1) to (3). It is a figure for demonstrating the bonus non-winning ratio at the time.

  First, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the winning probability of red cherry (1), the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when winning red cherry (1), and the bonus non-winning ratio when winning red cherry (1) are as follows: become that way.

Winning probability of red cherry (1) ... 813/65536 ≒ 1.24%
Red cherry (1) Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of winning ... 282/813 ≒ 34.6%
Red Cherry (1) Bonus non-winning ratio at the time of winning ... 531/813 ≒ 65.4%
Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the winning probability of red cherry (2), the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when winning red cherry (2), and the bonus non-winning ratio when winning red cherry (2) are: It becomes as follows.

Winning probability of red cherry (2) ... 339/65536 ≒ 0.51%
Red Cherry (2) Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of winning ... 245/339 ≒ 72.2%
Red Cherry (2) Bonus non-winning ratio at the time of winning ... 94/339 ≒ 27.8%
Here, when the red cherry (1) winning bonus winning ratio described in FIG. 55 (a) is compared with the red cherry (2) bonus winning winning ratio described in FIG. 55 (b), When the winning “Cherry (2)” is won by displaying two “Red Cherry” symbols on the 1 winning line, the bonus simultaneous winning rate is much higher than that of Cherry (1). It has become. Further, the reel control of the reels 2L to 2R is performed by a pull-in piece corresponding to the stop operation position specified from the stop control table created according to the internal winning situation and the reel stop situation (and the stop position of the stopped reel). The number of pull-in control is performed and stopped. In other words, in the second embodiment, the timing at which the “red cherry” symbol can be theoretically drawn on the one winning line described in the first embodiment (the above-mentioned maximum four-frame drawing is won when the winning combination can be won). The reel control is performed so that the “red cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line by operating the stop switch at a timing at which the symbol can be drawn in consideration of the winning symbol priority drawing or the like. For this reason, when the “red cherry” symbol is stopped at a timing that can be drawn in theoretically, a winning is generated in proportion to the winning probability. As a result, for example, when the left reel 2L is first stopped and the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the winning line and the red cherry (1) winning is confirmed, the “red cherry” symbol of the middle reel 2C is seen. By pushing, the “red cherry” symbol can be stopped and displayed on the same winning line, and it can be expected to win the cherry (2), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the winning probability of red cherry (3), the bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of red cherry (3) winning, and the bonus non-winning ratio at the time of red cherry (3) winning are: It becomes as follows.

Red cherry (3) winning probability 147/65536 ≒ 0.22%
Red cherry (3) Bonus simultaneous winning ratio at the time of winning ... 147/147 ≒ 100%
Red Cherry (3) Bonus non-winning ratio at the time of winning ... 0/147 ≒ 0%
In this manner, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when winning the cherry (3) in which three “red cherries” symbols are stopped and displayed on one winning line is set to be 100%. As a result, when three “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line, the player can recognize that one of the bonuses has been won. As a result, for example, when the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are stopped and the cherry (2) winning is confirmed, the expectation for the bonus is increased as described above, and the “red cherry” symbol of the right reel 2R is further observed. By pushing, the “red cherry” symbol can be stopped and displayed on the same winning line, and it can be expected to win the cherry (3), and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  Further, when the red cherry (3) is simultaneously won with the regular bonus, reel control is performed so that three “red cherry” symbols are not stopped and displayed on the single pay line in the pay lines L2 and L5. As a result, when three “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line and the pay line is L2 or L5, the big bonus (1) or big bonus ( It is possible to make the player recognize that he / she has won 2).

  Further, when the red cherry (3) is simultaneously won with the big bonus (2), the reel control is performed so that three “red cherries” symbols are not stopped and displayed on the single pay line in the pay line L5. As a result, when three “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed on one winning line and the winning line is L5, the big bonus (1) of the bonuses is won. Can be recognized by the player.

  In addition, when one of the red cherries (1) to (3) is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, if the bonus is simultaneously won and if the same is won simultaneously The reel control described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 is performed according to the type of bonus. Therefore, when one of the red cherries (1) to (3) is won and when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the appearance ratio at which the “red cherry” symbol appears on the winning line, Regarding the bonus simultaneous winning ratio for each stop position of the “red cherry” symbol and the bonus non-winning ratio for each stop position of the “red cherry” symbol, the ratio described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) Reel control is performed so as to be the same. Further, when the red cherries (1) and (2) are not simultaneously won with the bonus and the left reel 2L is stopped, the reel control is performed so that the “red cherry” symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle stage. . Therefore, when the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 2L, the player can be made aware that the bonus has been won simultaneously. In addition, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, a bonus is simultaneously won to the player when the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper stage than when it is displayed at the upper stage. You can have a greater sense of expectation for being.

  Next, main effects obtained by the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, when the bonus is won simultaneously, the red cherry (2) is won at a higher rate than when the bonus is not won simultaneously. Red cherry (3) is won only when the bonus is won at the same time. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, when the red cherry (2) is won, the bonus is simultaneously set to any bonus when the red cherry (2) is won, rather than the proportion of the bonus simultaneously won. The number of judgment values is set so that the winning percentage is higher. Also, the percentage of winning simultaneously with either bonus when winning Red Cherry (3) is higher than the ratio of winning simultaneously with either bonus when winning Red Cherry (2). The number of judgment values is set to be higher. As a result, as shown in FIG. 55, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio for red cherry (2) is higher than the bonus simultaneous winning ratio for red cherry (1), and the bonus for winning red cherry (2) is selected. The bonus simultaneous winning ratio for red cherry (3) is higher than the simultaneous winning ratio. Thus, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio increases in the order of red cherry (1), red cherry (2), and red cherry (3). As a result, when one of the bonuses is won simultaneously, it is possible to perform control to stop and display more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line at a higher rate than when neither bonus is won simultaneously. For this reason, it is possible to change the expectation that one of the bonuses is won simultaneously according to the number of “red cherry” symbols stopped and displayed on one winning line. As a result, for example, even after the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is further stopped and displayed on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for winning simultaneously.

  Also, the control for stopping and displaying more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line can be realized by adjusting the combination of winning combinations and winning probabilities. For this reason, it is possible to easily design a control for stopping and displaying more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line.

  Regarding the second embodiment described above, the same technical effect as in the case of the first embodiment described above can be obtained with the configuration based on the technical idea common to the first embodiment described above.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) Control to stop and display more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line at a higher rate when any bonus is won simultaneously than when none of the bonuses are won simultaneously In the first embodiment, an example is described in which reel control is performed, and in the second embodiment, an internal lottery is performed. However, the control to stop and display more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line is higher when either bonus is won simultaneously than when none of the bonuses are won simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to the one performed by the control shown in the embodiment. For example, the control to stop and display more “red cherry” symbols on one winning line at a higher rate when any bonus is won simultaneously than when no bonus is won simultaneously. By performing the control shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, that is, both the above-described internal lottery and reel control may be performed in combination, and either one may be selected and performed. It may be something like this. Even in such a configuration, even after the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is further stopped and displayed on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. This can improve the expectation that any one of the bonuses is won at the same time.

  (2) In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 11, an example is described in which red cherries have the same probability of winning simultaneously with the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. did. However, the probability that Red Cherry will win simultaneously with each of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus is not limited to the same, and the number of judgment values is different depending on the type of bonus. May be set. As a result, a “red cherry” symbol is derived on the left reel 2L, or a gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player according to the number of “red cherry” symbols stopped and displayed on one winning line. It is possible to change the expectation that the bonus to be controlled is won simultaneously.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, it is determined that any one of red cherries (1) to (3) is won at the same time as each of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. An example in which the total number of values is the same has been described. However, in the second embodiment as well, the total number of determination values that one of the red cherries (1) to (3) wins simultaneously with each of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2) and the regular bonus is The total number of determination values may be set to be different depending on the type of bonus.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which each of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus is always won at the same time as either red cherry or red cherry (1) to (3) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus may be read out as a lottery target and can be selected. Thereby, for example, even when the “red cherry” symbol on the left reel 2L is pushed up and the “red cherry” symbol is not displayed on the winning line and is not won, the big bonus (1), big It is possible to give a sense of expectation that one of the bonus (2) and the regular bonus is won.

  (3) In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 16, when one or two “red cherries” symbols are stopped and displayed on one winning line according to the winning situation, The example has been described in which the ratio of the actual pull-in stop is set in one winning line when the “red cherry” symbol of another reel is pressed. However, when one or two “Red Cherry” symbols are stopped on the 1 winning line, when the “Red Cherry” symbol on another reel is pressed, the actual paying is stopped on the 1 winning line. The percentage to be played is not limited to what is set according to the winning situation, for example, it is set according to the winning situation and the type of winning line on which the “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped. Also good.

  Specifically, the winning line in which the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed is L1, L2, L5, L1 and L3, L1 and L4, L2 and L4, L2 and L3. At the time of L3, L4, and L5, the ratio of actually being drawn into the winning line (or any winning line if there is more than one) when the “red cherry” symbol is pressed It may be set. When configured in this way, for example, when the bonus is in a winning situation where the “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped, the winning line on which the “Red Cherry” symbol is stopped is displayed as L1 than when the winning line includes either L2 or L4. , L3 and L5 are more likely to be drawn into the winning line (or any winning line if there are more than one) when the “red cherry” symbol is pressed. You may set so that. In addition, when the bonus is not won simultaneously, the winning line on which the “red cherry” symbol is stopped is displayed in any of L2 and L4 than when the winning line includes any of L1, L3 and L5. Even if it is set so that the ratio of actually being drawn in to the winning line (or any winning line if there is more than one) is increased when the “red cherry” symbol is pressed. Good. In addition, when the bonuses are won simultaneously, a setting is made so that the proportion of the “red cherry” symbols that are actually drawn into and stopped on the winning line according to the type of bonus among the winning lines L1, L3, and L5 is increased. May be. As a result, the bonus is simultaneously won when the winning line in which a plurality of “red cherry” symbols are stopped and displayed is one of L2, L3 and L5 than when the winning line is either L2 or L4. Can improve the expectation of being. In addition, it is possible to improve the expectation that a specific bonus is won simultaneously according to the type of the winning line in which a plurality of “red cherry” symbols are displayed in a stopped state.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as a bonus, the big bonus (1) controlled by RT after finishing on condition that the number of payouts reaches 406 or more, and the number of payouts reaches 271 or more. An example of the big bonus (2) that is terminated on the condition that is not controlled by RT and the regular bonus that is terminated on the condition that the payout number has reached 120 or more and is not controlled by RT has been described. However, the type of bonus is not limited to this.

  For example, as a big bonus (1) controlled to RT after the end, a plurality of types of big bonuses (big bonus (1)) having different expected values for the number of games to be continuously controlled due to different prescribed number of end conditions , (1 ′), (1 ″), etc.). Also, a big bonus (2) that is not controlled by RT after the end is continued due to a difference in the prescribed number of end conditions. A plurality of types of big bonuses (big bonuses (2), (2 ′), (2 ″), etc.) having different expected values of the number of games to be controlled may be provided. Furthermore, as regular bonuses, regular bonuses that are controlled to RT after the completion, multiple types of regular bonuses (regular bonuses (1), (1 ′), (1 ″), etc.) that are controlled to RTs with different degrees of advantage for the player ), And may be configured to control the type of big bonus according to the type of the generated big bonus. The number of games continuously controlled by the big bonus can be varied.

  When configured in this manner, a plurality of types of bonuses (Big Bonus (1), (1 ′), (1 ″), Regular Bonus (1), (1 ′), (1 ″)) controlled by RT after completion. Etc.) may be configured to control the RT to have a different degree of advantage for the player according to the type of the bonus that has been completed. For example, you may comprise so that it may control to RT according to the kind of completed bonus among several types of RT from which the expected value (number of continuation games) of the number of games controlled continuously by RT differs. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may control to RT according to the kind of completed bonus among several types of RT from which the probability of winning a replay differs.

  Also, big bonuses (1), (1 ′), (1 ″), big bonuses (2), (2 ′), (2 ″), regular bonuses (1), (1 ′), (1 ″), etc. In the case of FIG. 16, the reel control is performed so that the rate at which the “red cherry” symbol is actually drawn and stopped on one winning line differs depending on the type of bonus that Red Cherry is simultaneously selected. You may comprise. In this case, it may be configured such that the bonus that becomes a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage for the player is higher in the rate at which the “red cherry” symbol is actually drawn into and stopped at one winning line. Similarly, in FIG. 54, according to the type of bonus, the ratio of red cherries (1), red cherries (1) + (2), and red cherries (1) to (3) winning simultaneously with the bonuses. Differently, the number of determination values may be set. In this case, it may be configured such that the bonus that becomes a gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player increases the winning ratio at the same time as the red cherries (1) to (3). By configuring in this way, according to the number of “red cherry” symbols stopped and displayed on one winning line, a bonus is won simultaneously and the bonus is highly advantageous for the player. You can change your sense of expectation for something.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, in S603 of FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. When it is not 0, the release control for adjusting the BET number is performed. In the above, an example is described in which return control is performed in which it is determined that the BET number is not settled and the credit is settled based on the value of the credit counter. That is, the example in which the release control and the return control are performed separately and independently has been described. However, the release control and the return control may be performed by a single operation. For example, when the settlement switch 10 is operated, the release control and the return control may be performed based on the values of the BET counter and the credit counter. The release control is not limited to paying out medals corresponding to the number of BETs, but may be anything that can release the number of BETs, such as adding a BET number to a credit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the betting amount and credits can be settled by one settlement switch 10, that is, when the betting amount is set, the number of medals corresponding to the betting amount is returned. It functions as a switch, and when there are both bets and credits, it functions as a switch that returns only the number of medals corresponding to credits. However, it is possible to return the bets and credits with separate switches. It may be.

  Note that the timing for generating and transmitting the BET cancellation command described above is limited to when the value of the BET counter becomes 0 as long as it is generated and transmitted in response to the adjustment switch 10 being operated. For example, it may be generated and transmitted when subtraction of the value of the BET counter is started. Further, the timing for generating and transmitting the credit return command is not limited to when the value of the credit counter becomes 0 as long as it is generated and transmitted in response to the operation of the settlement switch 10. For example, it may be generated and transmitted when the credit counter value starts to be subtracted.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, when the sound effect volume is lowered, the sound volume is reduced from the maximum (MAX) to level 0 (silence). However, for example, the sound volume may be gradually reduced. (Fade out), the volume may be decreased stepwise according to the elapsed time. Furthermore, when the game is resumed, the volume may be gradually increased, or the volume may be increased in stages according to the elapsed time.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, as the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine, the sound volume of the sound effect is controlled to decrease from the maximum volume (MAX) at the set volume level to the volume 0 at once. Although the example has been described, for example, the volume of the sound effect may be controlled to a volume lower than the maximum, or when lowering, if the volume is reduced to a volume lower than the current volume, the volume is not necessarily reduced. The volume may be reduced to 0 or higher as long as the volume is 0, that is, the sound does not need to be muted and does not bother surrounding players. In addition, the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine is not limited to the control for lowering the volume, but the control for stopping the output of the sound effect, or other music (for example, music with a quiet volume, slow music Etc.) may be performed.

  (8) Operation unit provided in the slot machine 1 (start lever 7, single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, settlement switch 10, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, selection switch 56, determination switch 57, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, etc.) may be detected so that the RT state can be initialized (the value of the gaming state flag is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state). For example, the specific operation may be a combination of predetermined operations of two or more operation units. However, the procedure may be completely different from the operation related to the setting change. The operation procedure may be a combination of other operations including some operations.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is won before the power interruption, the CPU 41a indicates that the special role is won. An example has been described in which a power-on command is transmitted, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, a notification effect indicating that the special role is won is executed. However, not only a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, but also a notification effect that notifies the game state to be returned may be executed. For example, when the game state to be returned is the initial game state, the CPU 41a may transmit a power-on command indicating the initial game state and execute a notification effect indicating the initial game state to the sub-control unit 91. Good.

  In addition, as a notification device, a dedicated notification device may be provided, or the credit display device 11, the game auxiliary display device 12, the payout display device 13, and the sub control unit 91 that are directly controlled by the main control unit 41 control. You may utilize the indicator used in progress of games, such as the liquid crystal display 51. FIG.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, a method for restricting connector removal by attaching the connector restricting member 500 to the board case 200 is a cable 600a for connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110, and Although applied to the connector connection with the game control board 40, other connector connections, for example, the connector connection between the operation part relay board 110 and the cable 600a, the cable for connecting the operation part relay board 110 and the game electronic component Connector connection between 601a-g and operation unit relay board 110, cable 600b connecting game control board 40 and reel relay board 120, connector connection between game control board 40, connector between reel relay board 120 and cable 600b Connection, cable 601 for connecting the reel relay board 120 and the game electronic component -M and the connector connection between the operation unit relay board 110, the cable 600c connecting the game control board 40 and the power supply board 100, the connector connection between the game control board 40, the connector connection between the power supply board 100 and the cable 600c, the power supply A cable 601n for connecting the board 100 and the gaming electronic component, a connector connection between the power supply board 100 and o, a cable 600d for connecting the game control board 40 and the effect relay board 80, and a connector connection between the game control board 40; For connecting the effect relay board 80 and the cable 600d, connecting the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90, connecting the cable 601p and the effect relay board 80, connecting the cable 600p and the effect control board 90, etc. You may apply. That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of gaming electronic components are connected to the game control board via the relay board, all of the connector connection portions on the relay board side to which the gaming electronic component side cable and the game control board side cable are connected, The restriction method may be applied without omission to all connector connection portions on the game control board side to which the relay board side cable is connected.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a method for restricting the release of the connection between the connectors has been described. It is preferable to attach a covering member that covers the electronic parts to be performed and the connection points between the electronic parts and the cables so that they cannot be accessed from the outside. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent instrument such as a driving instrument from being attached to the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable for performing the above. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which a trace remains (such as a structure that cannot be removed unless a part of the covering member is destroyed) when the covering member that covers the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable is removed. By doing so, it becomes possible to leave a trace on which the illegal device is attached, and it is possible to grasp the possibility that there was an illegal act after the fact.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the connector restriction member 500 is configured separately from the board case 200, and the board case 200 is removed from the mounting base 250, whereby the connector restriction member 500 is removed from the board case 200, and the connector The removal restriction can be released. For example, when the connector restriction member 500 is once attached to the board case 200, the connector case 500 or a part of the connector restriction member 500 must be destroyed unless the connector is broken. The restriction member 500 may be removed from the board case 200 so that the restriction on the removal of the connector cannot be released.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the connector regulating member 500 includes the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520. After the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector. With the connector connected, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member 510, so that the connector can be prevented from being removed. By attaching the formed connector restricting member 500 to the substrate case 200, the connector can be prevented from being removed.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the connector restricting member 500 is used as the method for restricting the release of the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case has been described. It may be a method.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the description has been given of executing the control for generating the sound at the maximum volume level at the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch when the settlement is performed. . However, for example, in a slot machine that generates a predetermined notification sound when a setting change is performed (for example, when step S205 is performed or a setting change process is performed), the setting change is not performed. Control may be performed to generate a notification sound at the maximum volume at the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch when performed. As a result, the notification sound that the setting has been changed is generated at the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch. Compared with, it can be made easy to hear for the game hall staff.

  Further, for example, in a slot machine that generates a predetermined notification sound when an error (for example, a RAM abnormality error, a door opening error, a disconnection error, etc.) occurs, the volume set by the volume switch when the error occurs Control may be performed to generate the notification sound at the maximum volume at the maximum volume level regardless of the level. As a result, the notification sound that an error has occurred is generated at the maximum volume level regardless of the volume level set by the volume switch, so it is compared with that generated at the volume level set by the volume switch. Thus, it can be made easy for the player and the game hall staff to hear.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the lighting of the reel LEDs 55a to 55i is controlled in order to notify the winning combination has been described. However, the reel LEDs 55a to 55i may be configured to perform predetermined effects by controlling the lighting. For example, the reel LEDs 55a to 55i are set so that the winning lines L1 to L5 are emitted in a predetermined order when a predetermined condition is established according to the progress of the game, such as winning a special role, controlling the AT, and continuing RT. You may comprise so that lighting control may be carried out. Even in the case of such a configuration, as described in FIG. 38, the sub-control unit 91 starts on the condition that the gaming state command is received or the delay command is received, and the BET command is received. Triggered by the player's intention to start the next game, or the player's intention to interrupt the game such as receiving a BET cancellation command or credit return command. It may be configured to be terminated as follows. Thereby, it can prevent that an effect is performed continuously forever.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which one type of RT is controlled after the end of the big bonus (1) has been described. However, the type of RT is not limited to this, and may be controlled to any one of a plurality of types of RTs (for example, RT1 to RT3, etc.) having different probabilities for winning a replay or different numbers of prescribed games. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of RT is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this case, RT1 is further controlled on the condition that a predetermined bonus (for example, big bonus (1)) has ended, and a plurality of types of replays (for example, replay (1) to replay (3)) are performed in RT1. ), The number of determination values may be set so that the probability of winning at least Replay (2) and Replay (3) is higher than that in the initial gaming state. Thereby, when controlled to RT1, the probability of winning the replay (2) and the replay (3) is improved. Replay (2) and replay (3) can be won only at RT1 and do not win in gaming states other than RT1 (including those that are not read out as a lottery target role and those that have 0 judgment value) ).

  Furthermore, when winning a replay (2) when RT1, the probability of winning the replay (1) is controlled to RT2, which is more advantageous to the player than RT1, and when RT1 When winning the replay (3), the probability of winning the replay (1) is lower than when the RT2 is won, and even when the replay (2) is won, the RT3 is controlled, which is disadvantageous for the player who is not controlled by the RT2. You may comprise as follows. As a result, when controlled to RT1, it gives a sense of expectation to win the replay (2) and control to RT2, and also feels anxiety about winning the replay (3) and controlling to RT3. Compared with a slot machine that is not controlled by RT2 or RT3, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the predetermined bonuses described above are plural types (big bonuses (1), (1 ′), (1 ″), etc.), and each of the bonuses (1), (1 ′), (1 ″) has a prescribed number of bonuses. Different bonuses may be provided). RT1 controlled on the condition that a predetermined bonus has been completed includes a plurality of types of RTs having different probabilities of at least one of the probability of winning the replay (2) and the probability of winning the replay (3). Depending on the type of bonus, control is made to be predetermined RT (RT1 at the end of the big bonus (1), RT1 'at the end of the big bonus (1'), RT1 "at the end of the big bonus (1"), etc.) It may be configured. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of bonus is controlled, that is, whether the bonus is controlled to a type of RT1 having a high probability of winning the replay (2). In addition, the player may have a different expectation for being controlled to RT2 (RT having a high probability of winning Replay (2)) depending on the type of bonus to be controlled. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the same RT is controlled regardless of the type of bonus.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which RT is terminated when winning the regular bonus without terminating by winning the bonus. As a result, if the bonus is not won, even if the bonus is won, the RT can be controlled continuously until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT because the bonus is won when there are remaining games. Also, especially during RT, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a bonus, replay is won with a very high probability, and control with replay is prioritized over control with bonus. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the player has won. In addition, since the winning flag of the bonus is carried over after the next game until winning, after the RT reaches the specified number of games, it is possible to win the winning bonus during that time. At the end, the player's expectation for winning the bonus can be increased.

  In addition, although RT in the above-described embodiment has been described with respect to an example where it is terminated on the condition that the prescribed number of games has been consumed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to end on condition that a predetermined symbol (including a predetermined winning combination and a predetermined off symbol) is derived. Thereby, for each game, the player can have a sense of expectation and anxiety about the continuation of RT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the constituent symbols of the big bonuses (1), (2) and the regular bonus are three sets of the same symbol has been described. However, the constituent symbols of the big bonuses (1) and (2) and the regular bonus may be a combination of different symbols in each of the reels 2L to 2R. For example, the composition pattern of the big bonus (1) is a combination of “red 7-grape-melon”, the composition of the big bonus (2) is a combination of “grape-white 7-BAR”, and the composition of the regular bonus is It may be a combination of “white 7-grape-melon”.

  Further, when configured in this manner, the bonus medium effect may be the same content regardless of the type of bonus so that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled. Then, when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, it may be notified whether or not the control is performed after the bonus is finished. The predetermined notification condition may be satisfied if, for example, the game is consumed a predetermined number of times in the bonus, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in the bonus, or the bonus is terminated. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, making it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it becomes impossible to specify whether or not the RT is controlled after the bonus is over. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect for notifying whether it is a big bonus or controlled by RT after the bonus ends, so that the effect of the game can be effectively enhanced by performing the effect. Can be improved.

  When configured as described above, a liquid crystal display having a virtual reel for variably displaying a plurality of types of effect symbols is provided separately from the variable display device 2 and more easily visible than the variable display device 2. Then, the sub-control unit 91 starts variably displaying the virtual reels when the reel rotation is started in the variable display device 2, and when the display result is derived in the variable display device 2, the display result for effect corresponding to the display result May be derived. The sub-control unit 91 then displays a common bonus display result (for example, for example, as a display result for effects when any one of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus is derived in the variable display device 2). Red 7-red 7-red 7) may be derived. This makes it possible to inform the player that the bonus has been controlled in an easy-to-understand manner, but it is difficult to specify whether it is a big bonus or a big bonus (1) controlled by RT after the end. Can be a thing.

  (20-1) In the above-described embodiment, it has been explained that, in step S720, triggered by winning a bonus, it may be configured to control to RT until winning the corresponding bonus. For example, on the condition that the bonus is won, the RT is likely to receive fewer medals as in the initial gaming state although the replay winning probability is improved from the initial gaming state, that is, per game. It may be configured to control the RT so that the expected value of the number of medals to be acquired is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted.

  When configured in this way and controlled by RT on the condition that the bonus is won, for example, the processing (navigation related information determination processing, game effect execution processing) described at timing 4 in FIG. 36 is performed in the same manner. When it is decided to control to AT, it may be configured to control to RT + AT until the number of AT continuing games is consumed or the bonus is won and RT is finished. And during RT + AT, the expected value of the number of medals earned per game is made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets by winning the selected small role according to the navigation effect without missing it. The number of medals owned by the player may be increased.

  Further, such control to the AT is continued until the number of AT continuing games determined according to the type of mode is consumed. For this reason, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R so that the player does not win the bonus, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the AT is not controlled by the bonus and the AT ends before the number of AT continuing games is exhausted. . As a result, the player is awarded while operating the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R so as not to win a bonus and to win a small role notified by the navigation effect, while the number of AT continuing games is consumed. The number of medals should be acquired. In addition, after the number of AT continuation games has been digested and the AT has ended, it is possible to add an interesting effect such as controlling with a bonus, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Note that RT that is controlled on condition that the big bonus (1) has ended is similarly RT in which the expected value of the number of medals per game is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. It may be. And during RT + AT, winning the winning small role according to the navigation effect without winning, the expected value of the number of medals per game will be larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. The number of medals owned by a person may increase.

  (20-2) When configured as in (20-1) above, the bonus is read out as a lottery target role at the same time as any of the predetermined roles (for example, replay, banana), and an internal lottery is performed. You may do it. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not to control the AT according to the type and mode of the winning combination at the same time as the bonus and the number of AT continuing games. For example, if the winning combination at the same time is replayed, the probability that it will be determined to be controlled by AT or the number of times that the number of AT continued games will be determined is higher than when it is banana. Good. This makes it possible to give the player a different sense of expectation with respect to the number of AT continuation games according to the type of winning combination at the same time as the bonus, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Bonuses may be won in duplicate with replays that are not missed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a bonus from being won in a game won for replay and bonus. As a result, when a bonus is won, it is prevented from being immediately controlled by the bonus without being controlled by the AT, and the percentage controlled by the bonus is increased after the number of games continued to be controlled by the AT is exhausted. be able to.

  (20-3) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 35, the example in which the number of AT continuing games is determined according to the distribution of the shifted mode has been described. That is, the example in which the number of games controlled by the AT is determined as the specific value for specifying the notification period, which is a period controlled by the AT, has been described. Thereby, since it becomes an alerting | reporting period until it digests the game frequency determined after being controlled by AT, it can give a player a sense of security. However, the specific value is not limited to the number of games as long as it specifies a notification period that is a period controlled by the AT, for example, a continuation rate (for example, 30%, 70%, 90%, etc.) for continuous control by the AT. It may be a time to be controlled by the AT (for example, 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, etc.), and the number of notifications for notifying the selected small role when controlling to the AT (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times, etc.).

  When the continuation rate is determined as a specific value, a lottery is performed every time a predetermined number of games are consumed (for example, every game, every 20 games, etc.) according to the determined continuation rate, and the period until the lottery is lost May be a notification period. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that the AT will continue every predetermined number of games.

  Moreover, when determining time as a specific value, you may make into a notification period the period until time determined after having been controlled by AT. Thereby, the operation rate of the slot machine during the notification period can be improved.

  Moreover, when determining the number of notifications as a specific value, a period from when the AT is controlled to when the navigation effect is executed for the number of notifications may be set as the notification period. Thereby, the number of medals paid out during AT can be made substantially uniform.

  (20-4) Warning information for operating the winning bonus so as not to win the winning bonus during the AT in the case of the configuration as in (20-1) (for example, drawing the symbol of the winning bonus) The operation timing that cannot be performed and the type of the winning bonus) may be notified. Thereby, when the warning information is notified, the player can operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R so that the winning bonus is not erroneously derived.

  Such warning information may be notified by controlling the speakers 53 and 54. That is, the warning information may be notified by the sound volume adjustment process of FIG. As a specific example of the case where warning information is notified by controlling the speakers 53 and 54, for example, if the winning bonus is a temper (for example, if the bonus symbol winning the remaining one reel stops) In a slot machine that generates a predetermined sound effect (for example, “Puy” etc.) when a bonus is awarded), a special sound effect is provided on the condition that the winning bonus is tempered during AT. (For example, “Bee Bee” or the like) may be generated to notify the warning information. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that there is a possibility that the bonus is won during the AT and the AT may be terminated halfway.

  Note that the special sound effect may be generated not only when the winning bonus is tempered but also when the bonus symbol is stopped on one reel. As a result, the remaining two reels can be stopped so that the bonus is not derived. For this reason, even if a stop operation that causes a bonus to be derived for one of the remaining two reels is mistakenly performed (failed), it is stopped so that a bonus is not derived for the other reel. By performing the operation, it is possible to prevent the bonus from being derived. That is, it is possible to increase opportunities (chances) for performing a stop operation so as not to derive the winning bonus.

  Further, as another specific example in which warning information is notified by controlling the speakers 53 and 54, for example, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 53 and 54, or during AT. Alternatively, the volume of the continuous game sound effect may be minimized (mute) and restarted after the game ends. Thus, the navigation effect is performed using a liquid crystal display, a lamp, and the like, and the warning information is notified using a speaker, so that it is easy for the player to understand.

  In the case of the above configuration, when a bonus is won during an AT, the AT may be continued without performing navigation related information determination processing between the bonus winning and winning, or once After the AT is terminated, a navigation related information determination process may be performed and the AT may be controlled based on the determination result.

  (21) The AT in the above-described embodiment is terminated by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus. For this reason, during AT, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a random lottery is won, when a chance is derived, etc.), it is notified whether a big bonus or a regular bonus is won. You may comprise so that the production to perform may be performed. Thereby, it can be told by production whether AT continues or is complete | finished.

  (22) As shown in FIG. 35, according to the distribution of the mode being transferred, whether or not to control to AT, and how many games the number of AT continuation games will be (that is, how many specific values will be set) An example in which both are determined has been described. However, you may comprise so that it may be determined based on a separate event whether it controls to AT and how many specific values are made. For example, it is determined whether or not to control to AT based on the mode that has been transferred, and when it is determined to control to AT, a predetermined random number is used to determine how many specific values are to be determined. On the contrary, whether or not to control to AT is determined according to a predetermined random number, and how much a specific value is to be set based on the mode that is shifted when it is determined to control to AT It may be configured to be determined. This allows the AT to be controlled according to other events in addition to the type of mode, or to give the player a different sense of expectation for the number of AT continuation games and improve the fun of the game Can be made.

  (23) A navigation effect may be performed according to a predetermined probability during an initial game state other than during AT or during RT in the above-described embodiment. Even in such a configuration, the expected value of the number of medals acquired per game during the initial gaming state other than during AT or during RT will be smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. Since it is advantageous for the player to be controlled by the AT, the same effects as the various effects described above can be achieved.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, while being controlled by the AT, the number of net increases obtained by subtracting the number of medals set as the number of bets from the number of paid-out medals is counted, and the net increase is notified. It may be configured. Thereby, the player can recognize the number of medals increased during AT. In the case of such a configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of net increase is counted and notified until a series of ATs are completed. Also, after a series of ATs are completed, the number of net increase is continuously counted until a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed, and after a series of ATs are completed, a predetermined number of games are consumed. When the net increase number continuously counted is a predetermined number (for example, 1) or more when it is controlled again by the AT, it may be configured to continuously count and notify the net increase number. Thereby, the player can recognize the number of medals increased while being controlled continuously by the AT. You may comprise so that the number of net increase may be alert | reported using the payout display 13, the liquid crystal display 51, etc., for example.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, the special bonuses (1) and (2) and the regular bonus have been described as special display results. However, the special display results are not limited to these. For example, the number of sliding symbols on a predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 2L) is limited, and the gaming state is controlled such that winnings are permitted for all small combinations. It may be a challenge bonus.

  (26) In the above embodiment, when the set value is changed, all the data in the RAM 41c is initialized except for the stack area being used. However, in order to initialize the data in the RAM 41c, a separate initialization operation is performed when changing the set value (for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 turned ON, a data clear reset / It may be necessary to operate the setting switch 38). From the RAM abnormal error state, it may be possible to recover not only by simply changing the set value but also by initializing the data in the RAM 41c. Specifically, after a determination of YES in step S103 in FIG. 18, a step for determining whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is operated is provided, and the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by this step. When it is determined that the process has been performed, the process may proceed to step S109.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, all data in the RAM 41c is initialized except for the stack area being used in addition to the set value work 41c-4 in accordance with the change of the set value. . However, not only the data in the RAM 41c other than the stack area being used is initialized in accordance with the change of the set value as described above, but an initialization operation separate from the operation for changing the set value. As a result of (for example, operation of the reset / setting switch 38), all data in the RAM 41c is initialized except for the setting value work 41c-4 and the stack area being used, and as the setting value is changed. Thus, a new set value may be stored in the set value work 41c-4.

  Specifically, after step S102 of FIG. 18 is performed, a step for determining whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is operated is provided, and the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by the step. When the determination is made, a process of initializing all data in the RAM 41c except for the set value work 41c-4 and the stack area in use is performed, and whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state is determined. Processing to determine is performed, and when the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state by the processing, the process proceeds to step S110, and when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, processing for canceling the prohibition of interruption is performed. The game control process may be performed. Note that, when the reset / setting switch 38 is not operated, the process may proceed to step S104. Thereby, it is possible to recover from the RAM abnormal error state by initializing the data in the RAM 41c by performing not only the setting value changing operation but also the initialization operation. Further, from the RAM abnormality error state excluding the set value abnormality, the data in the RAM 41c can be initialized and restored by performing only the initialization operation.

  (28) In the above embodiment, 21 regions (frames) divided every 8 steps (each symbol) are defined for one rotation of the reel, and each region (region number) is defined as a stop control table. ), A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, a stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to an area in which one symbol varies. The reel stop control is performed by using, for example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) for each area less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. Reel stop control may be performed using a uniquely determined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor. Ri, it is possible to further diversify the stop position relative to the stop operation position. Also in this case, similarly to the selection of the stop control table in the above embodiment, it is possible to obtain an effect that the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  (29) In the above embodiment, when the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table is added to the random number for internal lottery, when an overflow occurs as a result of the addition, Was supposed to win. On the other hand, the acquired number of determination values may be sequentially subtracted from the acquired internal lottery random value, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new internal lottery random value. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  (30) In the above embodiment, the internal lottery is performed by sequentially adding the number of determination values of each combination corresponding to the game situation to the acquired random value for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows The role was determined to be a winner. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is also possible to perform an internal lottery by comparing the value of each with the determination value of each combination.

  (31) In the above embodiment, the determination value number storage area stores a determination value number in each case using a 2-byte area. However, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for a special combination cannot be set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. Thus, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  (32) In the above embodiment, the number of determination values is stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 4 or individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 4. . However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 4 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 3-4, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  (33) In the above embodiment, the variable display device 2 is provided with the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R having a plurality of symbols arranged in a predetermined order on the outer periphery, and the rotation of these reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The symbols are variably displayed by driving. However, a device that virtually displays a symbol on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be used instead of the variable display device 2 described above.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (35) In the above embodiment, the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 in response to the command for writing the effect data from the sub-control unit 91, and the effect data in the temporary storage memory 155. It was supposed to be transferred to the area. Then, when the image data of the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156, the effect data transferred to the effect data area is read. However, development of the image data in the frame buffer memory 156 is performed by an effect start command different from the command for transferring the effect data from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. On the other hand, if there is no effect continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games as a continuous effect as an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the CGROM 142 is used when starting each effect. The effect data can be transferred to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 and the expansion of the image data to the frame buffer memory 156 can be started as it is, and the CPU 91a can output a command to the VDP 141 only once. In particular, if the display frequency is high, such as an image according to the effect mode, it is convenient to make it resident in the temporary storage memory 155.

  (36) In the above embodiment, the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. The stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating, and the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel or the stopped reel) Stop operation position) Another stop control table is registered in the ROM 41b in advance, and based on the table index, the required stop control table is specified according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop state. Enabled, when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel is stopped and the reel is still rotating. When there are still, by referring to the table index may be set a stop control table for each rotating reel.

  (37) In the above embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of draw-in frames for the stop operation position, the internal winning state of each gaming state, the reel stop state (and the stopped state) The stop control table uniquely determined for the reel stop position or the stopped reel stop operation position) is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. A plurality of stop position specification tables that uniquely define stop positions are used in place of the stop control table, and when a stop operation is detected, the stop position specification table is referred to and unique corresponding to the stop operation position. Control may be performed to stop the reel at the stop position specified in FIG.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that are uniquely determined for the respective internal winning status of each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the number of frames to be pulled in, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. Kicking control (so-called control method control) may be performed in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. By performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position). Therefore, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reels that have stopped first may be controlled to stop the reels using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  (38) In the above embodiment, each game state is uniquely determined for each internal winning state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). The selected control pattern is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern. At least the control pattern determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the selected control pattern is selected. As long as the reel stop control is performed according to the above.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the control to the AT is started after the information related to the navigation effect is notified in the countdown effect has been described. However, the timing for starting the control to the AT is not limited to this, and the control to the RT is started if it is a predetermined timing after the control to the RT and the control to the AT is decided. Any timing may be used, such as a timing at which a game controlled to RT ends, a timing at which a game controlled to RT starts, or a timing at which a game ends a predetermined number of times.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the winning effect is started on the condition that the gaming state command or the delay command is received in the winning effect executing process in step Ss506 has been described. However, the condition for starting the winning effect is not limited to the condition that the game state command or the delay command is received as long as one game is completed. Also good. For example, on the condition that the winning information command transmitted in S913 has been received, the sub-control unit 91, when a small role winning is specified from the winning information command, the average required for paying out medals corresponding to the small winning combination The winning effect may be started when the time has elapsed, and the winning effect may be started from the received timing when the small role winning is not specified from the winning information command. Thereby, even if the transition to the game preparation state is delayed by being controlled to the freeze state without transmitting a new command, the winning effect is started from the timing when one game is finished. Can do.

  (42-1) In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 16, when the red cherry is won at the same time as one of the bonuses than when the red cherry is not won at the same time as any of the bonuses. An example has been described in which the control is performed so that more “red cherries” symbols are stopped and displayed on one pay line at a high rate. However, when the red cherry is not won at the same time as one of the bonuses and when it is won at the same time as one of the bonuses, the number of “red cherry” symbols will be stopped and displayed more frequently on one pay line. However, the present invention is not limited to this as long as control is performed. For example, a higher percentage of “Red Cherry” symbols will be stopped on one winning line when Red Cherry is not winning at the same time as one of the bonuses than when winning at the same time as one of the bonuses. In this way, the reel control of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R may be performed. As a result, the smaller the number of “red cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, the better the expectation that the bonuses are won simultaneously. For example, after the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Being able to improve the expectation that one of the bonuses is won at the same time.

  (42-2) When configured as in (42-1), contrary to the first embodiment, the bonus type won at the same time as the red cherry is larger than when the bonus type is the big bonus (1). When the bonus (2) is a regular bonus than when it is a big bonus (2), the percentage of “red cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line is higher. The reel control may be performed so as to be higher. As a result, the smaller the number of “Red Cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, the higher the expectation that the bonus controlled to the gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player will be won simultaneously. Can be made.

  (43-1) In the second embodiment described above, when the bonus is won simultaneously, the red cherry (2) is won at a higher rate than when the bonus is not won simultaneously. As for (3), the example of winning only when the bonus is won simultaneously has been described. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54, when the red cherry (2) is won, the bonus is simultaneously set to either bonus when the red cherry (2) is won, rather than the proportion of the bonuses simultaneously won. The number of judgment values is set so that the winning percentage is higher, and the red cherry (3) than the percentage that is simultaneously won for any bonus when winning the red cherry (2) The example in which the number of determination values is set so that the ratio of winning simultaneously with any of the bonuses is higher when winning is won. However, when red cherry (1) is won, the percentage of red cherry (2) won depends on whether the bonus is won at the same time as one of the bonuses. The present invention is not limited to this as long as the control is performed so that more symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, the percentage of red cherries (2) and cherries (3) when winning red cherry (1) is won at the same time as one of the bonuses than when winning at the same time as any of the bonuses. You may set the combination of lottery object combination and the number of judgment values so that it is higher when there is not. That is, when the bonus is not won simultaneously, the red cherry (1) is won at the same time as the red cherry (2) and red cherry (3) at a higher rate than when the bonus is won simultaneously. Also good. In addition, when you win Red Cherry (3), the percentage of winning at the same time when you win Red Cherry (2) is higher than the percentage of winning at the same time. Set the combination of lottery targets and the number of judgment values so that when red cherries (1) are won, the percentage of red cherries (1) won more than the percentage of winning simultaneously for any bonus. The combination of the lottery object combination and the number of determination values may be set so that the ratio of winning the bonus at the same time is higher. Thereby, the bonus simultaneous winning ratio increases in the order of red cherry (3), red cherry (2), and red cherry (1). As a result, when one of the bonuses is won simultaneously, it is possible to perform control to stop and display “red cherry” symbols on one winning line at a higher rate than when none of the bonuses are won simultaneously. For this reason, the smaller the number of “red cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, the higher the expectation that any of the bonuses can be won simultaneously. As a result, for example, after the “red cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, the “red cherry” symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. On the other hand, it is possible to improve the expectation that any one of the bonuses is won simultaneously.

  (43-2) When configured as in (43-1), contrary to the second embodiment, when the type of bonus is the big bonus (2) than when the bonus type is the big bonus (1) When the regular bonus is more than the big bonus (2), the percentage that the red cherry (1) wins simultaneously with the red cherry (2) or the red cherry (3) is higher than the single bonus. As described above, the combination of the lottery object combination and the number of determination values may be set. As a result, the smaller the number of “Red Cherry” symbols that are stopped and displayed on one winning line, the higher the expectation that the bonus controlled to the gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player will be won simultaneously. Can be made.

  (44) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the structure of the periphery of disconnection monitoring IC in a game control board. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the data format of a security signal. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a security signal, (b) (c) is a figure which shows the transmission condition of a security signal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the display control circuit mounted in the production control board. It is a figure which shows the storage area of RAM in a game control board. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the storage area of the number of judgment values. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM in a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating for every winning situation the stop operation position used as an appropriate timing which can win a red cherry, and the stop position of a "red cherry" symbol when stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing . It is a figure for demonstrating the ratio which the "red cherry" symbol of a left reel stops on a winning line when at least red cherry is elected. It is a figure for demonstrating the bonus simultaneous winning ratio when a red cherry is won and when a plurality of “red cherries” symbols are stopped on one winning line. For each winning situation, the ratio of the “red cherry” symbols of other reels stopping on the 1 winning line when the “red cherry” symbol of at least 1 reel is stopped on the 1 winning line It is a figure for doing. By operating the stop switch when it is displayed in the lower row, the “red cherry” symbol can be drawn into a single winning line. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a stop control table. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM abnormality error process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game control process which the control part in a game control board performs for every game. It is a flowchart which shows a BET process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a BET process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a payment process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a reel rotation process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a winning determination process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a payout process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process which the sub control part in an effect control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows an effect initial setting process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control recovery process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows production control interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect backup process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control process and a volume control process. It is a figure for demonstrating multiple types of modes and AT continuation game number. It is a figure which shows the timing chart for demonstrating an example of the timing at which navigation related information is determined. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning effect performed by changing the lighting state of reel LED. It is a figure which shows the timing chart for demonstrating an example of the timing when a prize production | presentation is performed by a prize presentation execution process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the substrate case to the attachment base. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the attachment side member and connector cap which comprise a connector control member. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 46, (b) (c) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the board | substrate case to the attachment base, and also attached the connector cap with respect to the attachment side member. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 48, (b) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the mounting base and cover member which comprise a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the cover member with respect to the mounting base. (A) is EE sectional drawing of FIG. 51, (b) is FF sectional drawing of FIG. It is a figure explaining the combination of the kind of winning combination in the slot machine in 2nd Embodiment, and the symbol in a variable display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the judgment value number of each lottery object combination acquired in internal lottery when the game state in 2nd Embodiment is an initial game state. Each red cherry (1) to (3) winning probability, red cherry (1) to (3) bonus winning ratio at the time of each winning, and red cherry (1) to (3) each in the second embodiment It is a figure for demonstrating the bonus non-winning ratio at the time of winning.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal display , 60a, 60b effect door, 90 effect control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory, 200 Board case, 250 mounting base, 500 connector regulating member, 510 mounting side member, 520 connector cover.

Claims (4)

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and a display result is derived to a variable display device having a plurality of variable display areas for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. A slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of identification information derived and displayed on a predetermined winning line as a display result of the variable display device,
Allowed to generate a plurality of types of winnings including a specific winning with a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player and a general winning other than the specific winning before the display result is derived to the variable display device Pre-determining means for deciding whether to do,
A specific carry-over means for determining that the generation of the specific winning is permitted and carrying over the fact that the generation of the specific winning is permitted when the specific winning has not occurred;
A derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result of the variable display device in accordance with a determination result of the pre-decision means for setting an allowance flag corresponding to a winning determined to allow the generation ;
Winning determination means for determining whether a winning has occurred when the display result of the variable display device is derived,
The pre-determining means includes
Alone determining means for determining the effect of setting the permission flag for a particular regular winning corresponding to the particular regular winning by allowing the generation of specific regular winning of the general winning without permitting the occurrence of pre-Symbol particular winning When,
Acceptable before SL for said particular regular winning by allowing the generation of specific regular winning when newly determined the fact that by allowing the occurrence of a specific winning sets the permission flag for a particular winning corresponding to the particular winning by determining the effect of setting the flag at the same time, the same prize as when effect that allows the generation of the particular regular winning is determined by the sole determining means, except that the permission flag for that particular winning is set And simultaneous determination means for determining to set an allowance flag corresponding to
The derivation control means determines the winning line of the predetermined variable display area in a predetermined one of the plurality of variable display areas according to the fact that the generation of the specific general winning is permitted. Including specific identification information derivation control means for deriving specific identification information on one of the winning lines,
The winning determination means, on condition that the combination of identification information derived on the one winning line is a combination of identification information including the specific identification information as identification information of the specific variable display area, Regardless of the identification information of the non-specific variable display area other than the specific variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas, it is determined that the specific general winning has occurred,
The specific identification information derivation control means is determined when the single determination means determines that the occurrence of the specific general winning is permitted and is a predetermined determination result for setting the specific general winning permission flag, and the simultaneous determination When it is determined that the occurrence of the specific winning is determined by the means, and the specific determination result is to set the allowable flag for the specific winning and set the allowable flag for the specific general winning, the ratio is different at different ratios. A slot machine, wherein the specific identification information is derived on the one winning line in the non-specific variable display area.   The specific identification information derivation control means derives a combination of identification information including a predetermined number of the specific identification information on the one winning line only when the specific determination result is obtained. 2. The slot machine according to 1. The variable display device has a plurality of winning lines,
The specific identification information derivation control means sets a combination of identification information including the specific identification information at a higher rate when the specific determination result is higher than when the specific determination result is the predetermined determination result. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the slot machine is led out to a specific winning line. The variable display device has a plurality of winning lines,
The specific prize includes a plurality of types of specific prizes including a first specific prize and a second specific prize,
A specific game state control means for controlling to a specific game state corresponding to the type of the specific winning game among a plurality of types of specific gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player when the specific winning game is generated;
The specific identification information derivation control means is configured so that the simultaneous determination means newly determines that the generation of the specific general prize is allowed simultaneously with the generation of the first specific prize. The combination of identification information including the specific identification information is derived to a specific winning line out of the plurality of winning lines at a higher rate when it is newly determined that the specific winning is allowed at the same time. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 , wherein the slot machine is characterized by that.

Images